718744
6
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/212
Pagina verder
Operation Manual
Embroidery and Sewing Machine
Product Code: 888-L01/L03/K00/K02
Be sure to read this document before using the machine.
We recommend that you keep this document nearby for future reference.
INTRODUCTION
i
Thank you for purchasing this machine. Before using this machine, carefully read the “IMPORTANT SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS”, and then study this manual for the correct operation of the various functions.
In addition, after you have finished reading this manual, store it where it can quickly be accessed for future reference.
Please read these safety instructions before attempting to use the machine.
DANGER - To reduce the risk of electrical shock
1Always unplug the machine from the electrical outlet immediately after using, when cleaning, making any user
servicing adjustments mentioned in this manual, or if you are leaving the machine unattended.
WARNING - To reduce the risk of burns, fire, electrical shock, or injury to
persons.
2Always unplug the machine from the electrical outlet when making any adjustments mentioned in the instruction
manual.
To unplug the machine, switch the machine to the symbol “O” position to turn it off, then grasp the plug and pull
it out of the electrical outlet. Do not pull on the cord.
Plug the machine directly into the electrical outlet. Do not use an extension cord.
Always unplug your machine if there is a power failure.
3Electrical Hazards:
This machine should be connected to an AC power source within the range indicated on the rating label. Do not
connect it to a DC power source or converter. If you are not sure what kind of power source you have, contact a
qualified electrician.
This machine is approved for use in the country of purchase only.
4Never operate this machine if it has a damaged cord or plug, if it is not working properly, has been dropped or
damaged, or water is spilled on the unit. Return the machine to the nearest authorized Brother dealer for
examination, repair, electrical or mechanical adjustment.
While the machine is stored or in use if you notice anything unusual, such as an odor, heat, discoloration or
deformation, stop using the machine immediately and unplug the power cord.
When transporting the machine, be sure to carry it by its handle. Lifting the machine by any other part may
damage the machine or result in the machine falling, which could cause injuries.
When lifting the machine, be careful not to make any sudden or careless movements, which may cause a
personal injury.
INTRODUCTION
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
ii
5Always keep your work area clear:
Never operate the machine with any air openings blocked. Keep ventilation openings of the machine and foot
control free from the build up of lint, dust, and loose cloth.
Do not store objects on the foot controller.
Do not use extension cords. Plug the machine directly into the electrical outlet.
Never drop or insert foreign objects in any opening.
Do not operate where aerosol (spray) products are being used or where oxygen is being administered.
Do not use the machine near a heat source, such as a stove or iron; otherwise, the machine, power cord or
garment being sewn may ignite, resulting in fire or an electric shock.
Do not place this machine on an unstable surface, such as an unsteady or slanted table, otherwise the machine
may fall, resulting in injuries.
6Special care is required when sewing:
Always pay close attention to the needle. Do not use bent or damaged needles.
Keep fingers away from all moving parts. Special care is required around the machine needle.
Switch the machine to the symbol “O” position to turn it off when making any adjustments in the needle area.
Do not use a damaged or incorrect needle plate, as it could cause the needle to break.
Do not push or pull the fabric when sewing, and follow careful instruction when free motion stitching so that
you do not deflect the needle and cause it to break.
7This machine is not a toy:
Your close attention is necessary when the machine is used by or near children.
The plastic bag that this machine was supplied in should be kept out of the reach of children or disposed of.
Never allow children to play with the bag due to the danger of suffocation.
Do not use outdoors.
8For a longer service life:
When storing this machine, avoid direct sunlight and high humidity locations. Do not use or store the machine
near a space heater, iron, halogen lamp, or other hot objects.
Use only neutral soaps or detergents to clean the case. Benzene, thinner, and scouring powders can damage the
case and machine, and should never be used.
Always consult the Operation Manual when replacing or installing any assemblies, the presser feet, needle or
other parts to assure correct installation.
9For repair or adjustment:
If the light unit is damaged, it must be replaced by an authorized Brother dealer.
In the event a malfunction occurs or adjustment is required, first follow the troubleshooting table in the back of
the Operation Manual to inspect and adjust the machine yourself. If the problem persists, please consult your
local authorized Brother dealer.
Use this machine only for its intended use as described in the manual.
Use accessories recommended by the manufacturer as contained in this manual.
The contents of this manual and specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.
For additional product information and updates, visit our website at www.brother.com
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
iii
SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
This machine is intended for household use.
FOR USERS IN COUNTRIES EXCEPT CENELEC
This appliance is not intended for use by persons (including children) with reduced
physical, sensory or mental capabilities, or lack of experience and knowledge,
unless they have been given supervision or instruction concerning use of the
appliance by a person responsible for their safety. Children should be supervised
to ensure that they do not play with the appliance.
FOR USERS IN CENELEC
This appliance can be used by children aged from 8 years and above and persons
with reduced physical, sensory or mental capabilities or lack of experience and
knowledge if they have been given supervision or instruction concerning use of the
appliance in a safe way and understand the hazards involved. Children shall not
play with the appliance. Cleaning and user maintenance shall not be made by
children without supervision.
FOR USERS IN THE UK, EIRE, MALTA
AND CYPRUS ONLY
IMPORTANT
In the event of replacing the plug fuse, use a fuse approved by ASTA to BS 1362, i.e. carrying the mark,
rating as marked on plug.
Always replace the fuse cover. Never use plugs with the fuse cover omitted.
If the available electrical outlet is not suitable for the plug supplied with this equipment, you should contact your
authorized Brother dealer to obtain the correct lead.
TRADEMARKS
iv
TRADEMARKS
IMPORTANT:
READ BEFORE DOWNLOADING, COPYING, INSTALLING OR USING.
By downloading, copying, installing or using the software you agree to this license. If you do not agree
to this license, do not download, install, copy or use the software.
Intel License Agreement For Open Source Computer Vision Library
Copyright © 2000, Intel Corporation, all rights reserved. Third party copyrights are property of their respective owners.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
Redistribution’s of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
Redistribution’s in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
The name of Intel Corporation may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
This software is provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties,
including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are
disclaimed. In no event shall Intel or contributors be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary,
or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use,
data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict
liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of this software, even if
advised of the possibility of such damage.
All information provided related to future Intel products and plans is preliminary and subject to change at any time, without notice.
WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE
v
WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE
B Basic operations
After purchasing your machine, be sure to read this section first. This section provides details on the initial setup
procedures as well as descriptions of this machine’s more useful functions.
Chapter 1 GETTING READY
Page B-2
To learn the operation of the principal parts and the screens
Chapter 2 STARTING TO SEW
Page B-36
To learn how to prepare for sewing and basic sewing operations
Chapter 3 STARTING TO EMBROIDER
Page B-51
To learn how to prepare for embroidering and basic embroidering operations
S Sewing
This section describes procedures for using the various utility stitches as well as other functions. It provides details on
basic machine sewing in addition to the more expressive features of the machine, such as sewing tubular pieces and
buttonholes.
Chapter 1 SEWING ATTRACTIVE FINISHES
Page S-2
Tips for sewing attractive finishes and various fabrics
Chapter 2 UTILITY STITCHES
Page S-7
Sew pre-programmed frequently used stitches
D Decorative sewing
This section provides instructions on sewing character stitches and decorative stitches as well as on adjusting and editing
them. In addition, it describes how to use MY CUSTOM STITCH, which allows you to create original stitch patterns.
Chapter 1 CHARACTER / DECORATIVE STITCHES
Page D-2
The variety of stitches widen your creativity
Chapter 2 MY CUSTOM STITCH
Page D-18
Create original decorative stitches
E Embroidering
This section provides instruction on editing embroidery patterns and recalling stored embroidery patterns.
Chapter 1 EMBROIDERY
Page E-2
Embroider artistically; by editing the built-in patterns you can easily create your own original designs.
A Appendix
This section provides important information for operating this machine.
Chapter 1 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Page A-2
The various maintenance and troubleshooting procedures are described.
CONTENTS
vi
INTRODUCTION.................................................. i
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ................. i
TRADEMARKS ..................................................... iv
WHAT YOU CAN DO WITH THIS MACHINE ..... v
B Basic operations
Chapter 1 GETTING READY 2
Names of Machine Parts and Their Functions....... 2
Machine................................................................................. 2
Needle and presser foot section ................................................... 3
Embroidery Unit..................................................................... 4
Operation buttons .................................................................. 4
Operation panel and operation keys....................................... 5
Using the flat bed attachment................................................. 5
Included accessories .............................................................. 6
Optional accessories .............................................................. 7
Using the utility stitch tables in the “Sewing” section ............. 8
Turning the Machine On/Off................................ 9
Turning on the machine ....................................................... 10
Turning off the machine ....................................................... 10
Select machine setting for the first time ................................ 10
LCD Operation ................................................... 11
Viewing the LCD.................................................................. 11
Using the settings key........................................................... 13
Adjusting input sensitivity for operation keys........................ 15
Saving a settings screen image to USB flash drive................. 16
Checking machine operating procedures.............................. 16
Winding/Installing the Bobbin............................ 17
Winding the bobbin ............................................................. 17
Installing the bobbin............................................................. 20
Upper Threading ................................................ 23
Threading the upper thread .................................................. 23
Threading the needle............................................................ 25
Threading the needle manually (without using the needle
threader)............................................................................... 26
Pulling up the bobbin thread ................................................ 27
Using the twin needle .......................................................... 27
Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations.................. 30
Replacing the Needle.......................................... 31
Checking the needle............................................................. 31
Replacing the needle............................................................ 31
Replacing the Presser Foot.................................. 33
Replacing the presser foot .................................................... 33
Removing and attaching the presser foot holder ................... 34
Chapter 2 STARTING TO SEW 36
Sewing ................................................................ 36
Stitch types........................................................................... 36
Sewing a stitch ..................................................................... 36
Sewing reinforcement stitches .............................................. 39
Automatic reinforcement stitching........................................ 39
Setting the Stitch ................................................ 41
Setting the stitch width ......................................................... 41
Setting the stitch length ........................................................ 41
Setting the “L/R Shift” ........................................................... 42
Setting the thread tension ..................................................... 42
Saving stitch settings............................................................. 43
Useful Functions................................................. 44
Automatically cutting the thread........................................... 44
Mirroring stitches ................................................................. 44
Adjusting the presser foot pressure ....................................... 45
Hands-free raising and lifting of the presser foot................... 45
Stitch Setting Chart............................................. 46
Chapter 3 STARTING TO EMBROIDER 51
Embroidery Step by Step .................................... 51
Attaching the Embroidery Foot .............................. 52
Attaching the Embroidery Unit .......................... 54
Embroidery Attractive Finishes .......................... 57
Preparing the Fabric........................................... 58
Attaching iron-on stabilizers (backing) to the fabric ............. 58
Hooping the fabric in the embroidery frame ........................ 58
Embroidering small fabrics or fabric edges........................... 61
Attaching the Embroidery Frame ....................... 62
Selecting Embroidery Patterns ........................... 64
Copyright information.......................................................... 64
Embroidery pattern types ..................................................... 64
Selecting an embroidery pattern .......................................... 64
Confirming the Pattern Position......................... 65
Checking the pattern position .............................................. 65
Previewing the selected pattern ........................................... 65
Embroidering ..................................................... 66
Embroidering a pattern ........................................................ 66
Changing the thread color display ....................................... 67
S Sewing
Chapter 1 SEWING ATTRACTIVE
FINISHES 2
Sewing Tips .......................................................... 2
Trial sewing........................................................................... 2
Changing the sewing direction
................................................. 2
Sewing curves........................................................................ 2
Sewing cylindrical pieces ...................................................... 2
Sewing an even seam allowance ........................................... 3
Sewing Various Fabrics ........................................ 4
Sewing thick fabrics............................................................... 4
Sewing thin fabrics ................................................................ 5
Sewing stretch fabrics ............................................................ 5
Sewing leathers or vinyl fabrics.............................................. 5
Sewing hook-and-loop fastener tape ...................................... 6
Chapter 2 UTILITY STITCHES 7
Basic Stitching...................................................... 7
Basting................................................................................... 7
Basic stitching........................................................................ 7
Blind Hem Stitching ............................................. 9
Overcasting Stitches .......................................... 12
Sewing overcasting stitches using overcasting foot “G”........ 12
Sewing overcasting stitches using zigzag foot “J” ................. 13
Sewing overcasting stitches using the side cutter
(sold separately with some models)...................................... 13
Buttonhole Stitching/Button Sewing .................. 15
Buttonhole sewing ............................................................... 15
Button sewing...................................................................... 18
Zipper Insertion ................................................. 20
Inserting a centered zipper................................................... 20
Inserting a side zipper.......................................................... 21
Zipper/piping Insertion ...................................... 24
Inserting a centered zipper................................................... 24
Inserting a piping................................................................. 25
Sewing Stretch Fabrics and Elastic Tape............. 26
Stretch stitching ................................................................... 26
Elastic attaching................................................................... 26
Appliqué, Patchwork and Quilt Stitching........... 27
Appliqué stitching................................................................ 27
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
vii
Patchwork (crazy quilt) stitching .......................................... 28
Piecing................................................................................. 28
Quilting ............................................................................... 30
Free motion quilting............................................................. 31
Satin stitching using the sewing speed controller.................. 32
Reinforcement Stitching ..................................... 33
Triple stretch stitching.......................................................... 33
Bar tack stitching ................................................................. 33
Darning ............................................................................... 34
Eyelet Stitching................................................... 36
Attaching Patches or Emblems to Shirt Sleeves
.... 37
Decorative Stitching........................................... 39
Fagoting............................................................................... 39
Scallop stitching................................................................... 40
Smocking............................................................................. 40
Shell tuck stitching............................................................... 41
Joining ................................................................................. 41
Heirloom stitching ............................................................... 42
D Decorative sewing
Chapter 1 CHARACTER / DECORATIVE
STITCHES 2
Selecting Stitch Patterns ....................................... 2
Selecting decorative stitch patterns/satin stitch patterns/7 mm
satin stitch patterns/cross stitch/utility decorative stitch
patterns.................................................................................. 2
Characters.............................................................................. 2
Sewing Stitch Patterns .......................................... 4
Sewing attractive finishes ....................................................... 4
Basic sewing .......................................................................... 4
Making adjustments ............................................................... 5
Editing Stitch Patterns .......................................... 7
Changing the size .................................................................. 8
Changing the length (for 7 mm satin stitch patterns only) ....... 8
Creating a horizontal mirror image ........................................ 8
Sewing a pattern continuously ............................................... 9
Changing thread density (for satin stitch patterns only)........... 9
Returning to the beginning of the pattern ............................... 9
Checking the image ............................................................. 10
Combining Stitch Patterns .................................. 11
Before combining ................................................................ 11
Combining various stitch patterns ........................................ 11
Combining large and small stitch patterns ............................ 11
Combining horizontal mirror image stitch patterns............... 12
Combining stitch patterns of different length ........................ 12
Making step stitch patterns................................................... 13
Using The Memory Function .............................. 14
Stitch data precautions......................................................... 14
Saving stitch patterns in the machine’s memory ................... 14
Saving stitch patterns to USB flash drive............................... 15
Retrieving stitch patterns from the machine’s memory.......... 16
Recalling from USB flash drive............................................. 16
Chapter 2 MY CUSTOM STITCH 18
Designing a Stitch............................................... 18
Entering Stitch Data ........................................... 20
Editing a built-in sample pattern........................................... 22
Using Stored Custom Stitches............................. 23
Storing custom stitches in your list ....................................... 23
Retrieving stored stitches...................................................... 23
E Embroidering
Chapter 1 EMBROIDERY 2
Selecting Patterns ................................................. 2
Selecting embroidery patterns/Brother “Exclusives”/floral
alphabet patterns.................................................................... 2
Selecting character patterns.................................................... 2
Selecting frame patterns ......................................................... 4
Editing Patterns .................................................... 5
Moving the pattern ................................................................. 6
Changing the size of the pattern ............................................. 6
Rotating the pattern ................................................................ 7
Changing the thread color ...................................................... 7
Creating a horizontal mirror image......................................... 7
Changing the density (alphabet character and frame
patterns only) ......................................................................... 8
Deleting the pattern................................................................ 8
Displaying patterns in the screen magnification...................... 8
After editing ........................................................................... 8
Editing Character Patterns ................................... 9
Changing the colors of alphabet character patterns ................ 9
Switching between text written vertically and horizontally ..... 9
Changing the font of entered characters ............................... 10
Changing character spacing ................................................. 10
Separating combined character patterns ............................... 10
Editing single characters ....................................................... 11
Changing the configuration of character patterns.................. 12
Combining Patterns............................................ 13
Editing combined patterns .................................................... 13
Embroidering combined patterns.......................................... 14
Editing All Patterns............................................. 15
Moving the pattern ............................................................... 15
Rotating the pattern .............................................................. 15
Aligning the pattern and the needle...................................... 15
Embroidering linked characters ............................................ 16
Embroidery Applications.................................... 18
Sewing embroidery patterns which use appliqué.................. 18
Using a frame pattern to make an appliqué (1) ..................... 20
Using a frame pattern to make an appliqué (2) ..................... 21
Sewing split embroidery patterns.......................................... 22
Adjustments During the Embroidery Process ..... 23
If the bobbin runs out of thread ............................................ 23
If the thread breaks during sewing ........................................ 24
Restarting from the beginning............................................... 24
Resuming embroidery after turning off the power ................. 24
Making Embroidery Adjustments ....................... 26
Adjusting thread tension....................................................... 26
Adjusting the bobbin case (with no color on the screw)........ 27
Using the automatic thread cutting function
(END COLOR TRIM) ............................................................ 28
Adjusting the embroidery speed ........................................... 28
Changing the “Embroidery Frame Display” .......................... 28
Selecting/displaying patterns according to the embroidery
frame size............................................................................. 29
Changing the background colors of the embroidery
patterns ................................................................................ 30
Specifying the size of pattern thumbnails.............................. 30
Using the Memory Function............................... 31
Embroidery data precautions ................................................ 31
Saving embroidery patterns in the machine’s memory .......... 32
Saving embroidery patterns to USB flash drive ..................... 33
Retrieving patterns from the machine’s memory ................... 34
Recalling from USB flash drive ............................................. 34
A Appendix
Chapter 1 MAINTENANCE AND
TROUBLESHOOTING 2
Care and Maintenance......................................... 2
Restrictions on oiling.............................................................. 2
Precautions on storing the machine........................................ 2
Cleaning the LCD Screen ....................................................... 2
Cleaning the machine surface ................................................ 2
CONTENTS
viii
Cleaning the race ................................................................... 2
About the maintenance message ............................................ 4
Touch panel is malfunctioning ............................................... 4
Operation beep ...................................................................... 4
Troubleshooting.................................................... 5
Frequent troubleshooting topics ............................................. 5
Upper thread tightened up ..................................................... 5
Tangled thread on wrong side of fabric .................................. 6
Incorrect thread tension.......................................................... 7
Fabric is caught in the machine and cannot be removed ........ 8
If the thread becomes tangled under the bobbin winder seat
..... 11
List of symptoms................................................................... 13
Error messages...................................................................... 20
Upgrading your machine’s software using USB
flash drive........................................................... 22
Index .................................................................. 23
Basic
operations
This section provides details on the initial setup procedures as well as descriptions of this
machine’s more useful functions.
Page number starts with “B” in this section.
Chapter1 GETTING READY....................................................... B-2
Chapter2 STARTING TO SEW................................................. B-36
Chapter3 STARTING TO EMBROIDER................................. B-51
Names of Machine Parts and Their Functions
B-2
The names of the various parts of the machine and their functions are described below. Before using the machine,
carefully read these descriptions to learn the names of the machine and their locations.
Machine
Front view
1 Top cover
Open the top cover to place the spool of thread on the spool
pin.
2 Thread guide plate
Pass the thread around the thread guide plate when threading
the upper thread.
3 Bobbin winding thread guide and pretension disk
Pass the thread under this thread guide and around the
pretension disk when winding the bobbin thread.
4 Spool cap
Use the spool cap to hold the spool of thread in place.
5 Spool pin
Place a spool of thread on the spool pin.
6 Bobbin winder
Use the bobbin winder when winding the bobbin.
7 LCD (liquid crystal display)
Settings for the selected stitch and error messages appear in
the LCD. (page B-11)
8 Operation panel
From the operation panel, stitch settings can be selected and
edited, and operations for using the machine can be selected.
(page B-5)
9 Knee lifter mounting slot
Insert the knee lifter into the knee lifter mounting slot.
0 Knee lifter
Use the knee lifter to raise and lower the presser foot. (page B-
45)
A Operation buttons and sewing speed controller
Use these buttons and the slide to operate the machine.
(page B-4)
B Flat bed attachment
Insert the presser foot accessory tray into the accessory
compartment of the flat bed attachment. Remove the flat bed
attachment when sewing cylindrical pieces such as sleeve
cuffs.
C Thread cutter
Pass the threads through the thread cutter to cut them.
D Needle threader lever
Use the needle threader lever to thread the needle.
Chapter 1
GETTING READY
Names of Machine Parts and Their Functions
a
b
c
d
e
f
h
k
l
m
n
g
i
j
Names of Machine Parts and Their Functions
GETTING READY
Basic operations B-3
B
Right-side/rear view
1 Handwheel
Turn the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise) to raise and
lower the needle to sew one stitch.
2 Handle
Carry the machine by its handle when transporting.
3 Presser foot lever
Raise and lower the presser foot lever to raise and lower the
presser foot.
4 Feed dog position switch
Use the feed dog position switch to raise and lower the feed
dogs. (page S-31)
5 Main power switch
Use the main power switch to turn the machine on and off.
6 Power supply jack
Insert the plug on the power cord into the power supply jack.
7 Foot controller
Depress the foot controller to control the speed of the machine.
(page B-38)
8 Air vent
The air vent allows the air surrounding the motor to circulate.
Do not cover the air vent while the machine is being used.
9 Foot controller jack
Insert the plug on the end of the foot controller cable into the
foot controller jack.
0 USB port (for a USB flash drive)
In order to import patterns from a USB flash drive, insert the
USB flash drive directly into the USB port.
Needle and presser foot section
1 Needle bar thread guide
Pass the upper thread through the needle bar thread guide.
2 Needle plate
The needle plate is marked with guides for sewing straight
seams.
3 Needle plate cover
Remove the needle plate cover to clean the bobbin case and
race.
4 Bobbin cover/bobbin case
Remove the bobbin cover and then insert the bobbin into the
bobbin case.
5 Feed dogs
The feed dogs feed the fabric in the sewing direction.
6 Presser foot
The presser foot applies pressure consistently on the fabric as
the sewing takes place. Attach the appropriate presser foot for
the selected stitch.
7 Presser foot holder
The presser foot is attached onto the presser foot holder.
8 Presser foot holder screw
Use the presser foot holder screw to hold the presser foot in
place. (page B-34, B-52)
9 Buttonhole lever
Lower the buttonhole lever when sewing buttonholes and bar
tacks or when darning.
a
b
c
d
e
g
h
i
f
j
i
b
a
c
d
e
f
g
h
Names of Machine Parts and Their Functions
B-4
Embroidery Unit
1 Frame-securing lever
Press the frame-securing lever to the left to attach or remove
the embroidery frame. (page B-62)
2 Embroidery unit connector
Insert the embroidery unit connector into the connection port
when attaching the embroidery unit. (page B-54)
3 Carriage
The carriage moves the embroidery frame automatically when
embroidering. (page B-55)
4 Release button (located under the embroidery unit)
Press the release button to remove the embroidery unit.
(page B-56)
Operation buttons
1 “Start/Stop” button
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start or stop sewing. The
machine stitches at a slow speed at the beginning of sewing
while the button is pressed. When sewing is stopped, the
needle is lowered in the fabric. For details, refer to “STARTING
TO SEW” on page B-36.
The button changes color according to the machine’s
operation mode.
2 Reverse stitch button
For straight, zigzag, and elastic zigzag stitch patterns that use
reverse stitches, the machine will sew reverse stitches at low
speed only while holding down the Reverse stitch button. The
stitches are sewn in the opposite position.
For other stitches, use this button to sew reinforcement
stitches at the beginning and end of sewing. Press and hold
this button, and the machine sews 3 stitches in the same spot
and stops automatically. (page B-39)
3 Reinforcement stitch button
Use this button to sew a single stitch repeatedly and tie-off.
For character/decorative stitches, press this button to end with
a full stitch instead of at a mid-point. The LED light beside this
button lights up while the machine is sewing a full motif, and
automatically turns off when the sewing is stopped. (page B-
39)
4 Needle position button
Press the needle position button to raise or lower the needle.
Pressing the button twice sews one stitch.
5 Thread cutter button
Press the thread cutter button after sewing is stopped to cut
both the upper and the bobbin threads. For details, refer to
step
l under the “Sewing a stitch” on page B-36.
6 Sewing speed controller
Slide the sewing speed controller to adjust the sewing speed.
CAUTION
Before inserting or removing the embroidery
unit, turn the main power to OFF.
d
a
b
c
Green: The machine is ready to sew or is sewing.
Red: The machine can not sew.
Orange: The machine is winding the bobbin thread, or
the bobbin winder shaft is moved to the right
side.
CAUTION
Do not press (Thread cutter button) after
the threads have already been cut, otherwise
the needle may break, the threads may
become tangled or damage to the machine
may occur.
b
c
de
a
f
Names of Machine Parts and Their Functions
GETTING READY
Basic operations B-5
B
Operation panel and operation keys
1 LCD (liquid crystal display) (touch panel)
Selected pattern settings and messages are displayed.
Touch the keys displayed on the LCD to perform operations.
For details, refer to “LCD Operation” on page B-11.
2 Previous page key
Displays the previous screen when there are items that are not
displayed on the LCD.
3 Next page key
Displays the next screen when there are items that are not
displayed on the LCD.
4 Help key
Press to get help on using the machine.
5 Settings key
Press to set the needle stop position, the buzzer sound, and
more.
6 Embroidery key
Press this key to sew embroidery.
7 Utility stitch key
Press this key to select a utility stitch or decorative stitch.
8 Back key
Press to return to the previous screen.
9 Presser foot/Needle exchange key
Press this key before changing the needle, the presser foot,
etc. This key locks all key and button functions to prevent
operation of the machine.
Using the flat bed attachment
Pull the top of the flat bed attachment to open the accessory
compartment.
A presser foot accessory tray is stored in the accessory
compartment of the flat bed attachment.
1 Storage space of the flat bed attachment
2 Presser foot accessory tray
3 Embroidery foot “Q”
Note
The operation keys of this machine are
capacitive touch sensors. Operate the keys by
directly touching them with your finger.
The response of the keys varies according to the
user. The pressure exerted on the keys does not
affect the response of the keys.
Since the operation keys react differently
depending on the user, adjust the setting for
“Adjusting input sensitivity for operation keys” on
page B-15.
When using an electrostatic touch pen, make
sure that its point is 8 mm or more. Do not use a
touch pen with a thin point or a unique shape.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
b
a
c
Names of Machine Parts and Their Functions
B-6
Included accessories
Included accessories may differ from the table below depending on the machine model you purchased. For more details on
included accessories and their part codes of your machine, refer to the Quick Reference Guide.
* These accessories are included in the same box as the embroidery unit.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Zigzag foot “J” (on machine) Monogramming foot “N Overcasting foot “G” Zipper foot “I” Blind stitch foot “R” Button fitting foot “M
7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
Buttonhole foot “A Embroidery foot “Q”
Needle set
*1
Twin needle
*2
Bobbin (4)
(One is on machine.)
Seam ripper
13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18.
Scissors Cleaning brush Eyelet punch Screwdriver (large) Screwdriver (small) Disc-shaped screwdriver
19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24.
Horizontal spool pin Spool cap (large) Spool cap (medium) (2)
(One is on machine.)
Spool cap (small) Thread spool insert
(mini king thread spool)
Spool net
25. 26. 27.* 28. 29.*
Knee lifter Standard bobbin case (green
marking on the screw)
(on machine)
Alternate bobbin case (no
color on the screw)
Foot controller Embroidery frame set (large)
18 cm (H) × 13 cm (W) (7 inches (H) × 5 inches (W))
30.* 31. 32. 33. 34. 35.
Embroidery bobbin thread
(60 weight, white)
Accessory bag Grid sheet set Operation Manual Quick Reference Guide Embroidery Design Guide
*1
75/11 2 needles,
90/14 2 needles,
90/14 2 needles: Ball point needle (gold colored)
*2
2/11 needle
(For U.S.A. only) Foot controller: Model T
This foot controller can be used on the machine with product code 888-L01/K00. The product code is mentioned
on the machine rating plate.
J
N
G
I
R
M
A
Q
Names of Machine Parts and Their Functions
GETTING READY
Basic operations B-7
B
Optional accessories
The following are available as optional accessories to be purchased separately. For more optional accessories and their part
codes, refer to the Quick Reference Guide.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Quilting foot Walking foot 1/4" quilting foot 1/4" quilting foot with guide Quilting guide Side cutter “S”
7. 8. 9. 10. 11.
Open toe foot Non stick foot Stitch guide foot “P” Adjustable zipper/piping foot Embroidery frame set (extra large (multi-position))
30 cm (H) × 13 cm (W) (12 inches (H) × 5 inches (W))
12. 13. 14. 15.
Embroidery frame set (medium)
10 cm (H) × 10 cm (W) (4 inches (H) × 4 inches (W))
Embroidery frame set (small)
2 cm (H) × 6 cm (W) (1 inch (H) × 2-1/2 inches (W))
Embroidery bobbin thread
(60 weight, white/black)
Straight stitch foot and
needle plate set
16. 17. 18. 19.
Stabilizer material for
embroidery
Water soluble stabilizer Roller foot Free motion open toe
quilting foot “O”
To obtain optional accessories or parts, contact your authorized Brother dealer.
All specifications are correct at the time of printing. Please be aware that some specifications may change without
notice.
A variety of feet are available to enable different types of stitching and finishes. Visit your nearest authorized Brother
dealer for a complete listing of optional accessories available for your machine.
Always use accessories recommended for this machine.
P
O
Names of Machine Parts and Their Functions
B-8
Using the utility stitch tables in the “Sewing”
section
The utility stitch numbers differ depending on the model of
your machine. Refer to the column titled “Model 4” for your
machine.
Stitch name Stitch
Model 4
Presser foot
Model 3, 2
Model 1
Stitch number
Basting stitch 1-08 08 07
J
Straight stitch (Left)
1-01
01
* 01*
1-02
02
* 02*
Straight stitch (Middle) 1-03
03
* 03*
Triple stretch stitch 1-05
05
* 05*
Turning the Machine On/Off
GETTING READY
Basic operations B-9
B
Turning the Machine On/Off
WARNING
Use only regular household electricity for the power source. Using other power sources may result in fire,
electric shock, or damage to the machine.
Make sure that the plugs on the power cord are firmly inserted into the electrical outlet and the power
cord receptacle on the machine. Otherwise, a fire or electric shock may result.
Do not insert the plug on the power cord into an electrical outlet that is in poor condition.
Turn the main power to OFF and remove the plug in the following circumstances:
When you are away from the machine
After using the machine
When the power fails during use
When the machine does not operate correctly due to a bad connection or a disconnection
During electrical storms
CAUTION
Use only the power cord included with this machine.
Do not use extension cords or multi-plug adapters with any other appliances plugged into them. Fire or
electric shock may result.
Do not touch the plug with wet hands. Electric shock may result.
When unplugging the machine, always turn the main power to OFF first. Always grasp the plug to remove
it from the electrical outlet. Pulling on the cord may damage the cord, or lead to fire or electric shock.
Do not allow the power cord to be cut, damaged, modified, forcefully bent, pulled, twisted, or bundled.
Do not place heavy objects on the cord. Do not subject the cord to heat. These things may damage the
cord, or cause fire or electric shock. If the cord or plug is damaged, take the machine to your authorized
Brother dealer for repairs before continuing use.
Unplug the power cord if the machine is not to be used for a long period of time. Otherwise, a fire may
result.
When leaving the machine unattended, either the main switch of the machine should be turned to OFF or
the plug must be removed from the electrical outlet.
When servicing the machine or when removing covers, the machine must be unplugged.
•(For U.S.A. only)
This appliance has a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). To reduce the risk of electrical
shock, this plug is intended to fit in a polarized electrical outlet only one way.
If the plug does not fit fully in the electrical outlet, reverse the plug. If it still does not fit, contact a
qualified electrician to install the proper electrical outlet. Do not modify the plug in any way.
Turning the Machine On/Off
B-10
Turning on the machine
a
Make sure that the machine is turned off (the main
power switch is set to “ ”), and then plug the power
cord into the power supply jack on the right side of the
machine.
b
Insert the plug of the power cord into a household
electrical outlet.
1 Power supply jack
2 Main power switch
c
Press the right side of the main power switch on the
right side of the machine to turn the machine on (set it
to “I”).
The light, LCD and the “Start/Stop” button light up
when the machine is turned on.
d
When the machine is turned on, the opening movie is
played. Press anywhere on the screen.
Turning off the machine
When you are finished using the machine, turn it off. In
addition, before transporting the machine to another location,
be sure to turn it off.
a
Make sure that the machine is not sewing.
b
Press the main power switch on the right side of the
machine in the direction of the “ symbol to turn
the machine off.
Select machine setting for the first time
When you first turn on the machine, select the language of
your choice. Follow the procedure below when the settings
screen appears automatically.
a
Press and to select your choice of language.
b
Press .
Memo
When the machine is turned on, the needle and
the feed dogs will make a sound when they move;
this is not a malfunction.
If the machine is turned off in the middle of sewing
in the “Sewing” function, the operation will not be
resume after turning the power on again.
1
2
LCD Operation
GETTING READY
Basic operations B-11
B
Viewing the LCD
An opening movie may be displayed when the power is turned on. When the opening movie is displayed, the screen will be
displayed if you touch the LCD with your finger. Press a key with your finger to select the stitch pattern, to select a machine
function, or to select an operation indicated on the key.
The screen below appears when you press on the operation panel.
This section contains a description of the utility stitch screen, which appears when any of the keys indicated by 1 is pressed.
Pressing any of the keys indicated by 2 displays the character/decorative stitch screen. For details, refer to the “Decorative
sewing” section.
LCD Operation
1
2
LCD Operation
B-12
Utility stitch screen Utility stitch editing screen
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
1 Stitches Press the key for the pattern you want to sew. B-36
2 Pattern display size Show the approximate size of the pattern selected.
100%: Nearly the same size as the sewn pattern
50%: 1/2 the size of the sewn pattern
25%: 1/4 the size of the sewn pattern
The actual size of the sewn pattern may differ depending on the type of fabric and
thread that is used.
3 Stitch preview Shows a preview of the selected stitch. Approximate size of the pattern selected
shows at the bottom of the stitch preview. When shown at 100%, the stitch appears
in the screen at nearly its actual size.
B-36
4 Presser foot Shows presser foot to be used. B-33
5 Needle position setting Shows single or twin needle mode setting, and the needle stop position.
: Single needle/down position
: Single needle/up position
: Twin needle/down position
: Twin needle/up position
B-13
6 Stitch width Shows the stitch width of the currently selected stitch pattern. B-41
7 Stitch length Shows the stitch length of the currently selected stitch pattern. B-41
8 L/R Shift Shows the tendency of left/right of the center line for the original zigzag stitch. B-42
9 Thread tension Shows the automatic thread tension setting for the currently selected stitch pattern. B-42
0 Manual adjustment key Press this key to display the following manual adjustment screen.
You can adjust the value of each item by pressing / .
1 Press to save stitch settings to machine memory (Width/Length/L/R Shift/
Tension).
2 Press to return the stitch settings to default.
B-43
A Page display Shows additional pages that can be displayed.
B Edit/stitch switching key Press this key to toggle between the edit screen and the stitch screen. B-12
C Image key Shows a preview of the sewn image.
D Automatic thread cutting
key
Press this key to set the automatic thread cutting function. B-44
E Automatic reverse/
reinforcement key
Press this key to use the automatic reverse/reinforcement stitch function. B-39
F Single/repeat sewing key Press this key to choose single pattern or continuous patterns. Depending on the
selected stitch, this key may be disabled.
G Back to beginning key When sewing is stopped, press this key to return to the beginning of the pattern. For
details, refer to “Returning to the beginning of the pattern” in the “Decorative sewing”
section.
H Mirror image key After selecting the stitch pattern, use this key to create a horizontal mirror image of
the stitch pattern.
B-44
0
A
9876
5
4
3
E D C
B
1
2
0
F
9876
5
4
3
E D C
G
H
B
1
2
LCD Operation
GETTING READY
Basic operations B-13
B
Using the settings key
Press to change the default machine settings (needle stop position, embroidery speed, opening display, etc.). Press or
, after you changed necessary settings.
Sewing settings
1 Select whether to use the sewing speed controller to determine the zigzag width. For details, refer to “Satin stitching using the
sewing speed controller” in the “Sewing” section.
2 Make adjustments to character or decorative stitch patterns. For details, refer to “Making adjustments” in the “Decorative
sewing” section.
3 Set to “ON” when using twin needle. (page B-27)
4 Adjust the presser foot pressure. (The higher the number, the greater the pressure will be. Set the pressure at “3” for normal
sewing.) (page B-45)
5 Select either “1-01 Straight stitch (Left)” or “1-03 Straight stitch (Middle)” as the utility stitch that is automatically selected when
the machine is turned on.
6 When set “ON”, reinforcement stitches are sewn at the beginning and/or end of sewing for a reinforcement stitch pattern, even
when the reverse button is pressed.
Embroidery settings
7 Select the embroidery frame to be used. For details, refer to “Changing the “Embroidery Frame Display”” in the “Embroidering”
section.
8 Select the center mark and grid lines that are displayed. For details, refer to “Changing the “Embroidery Frame Display”” in the
“Embroidering” section.
9 When set to “ON”, the embroidery pattern can be selected according to the embroidery frame size that you have selected in
number
7. For details, refer to “Selecting/displaying patterns according to the embroidery frame size” in the “Embroidering”
section.
0 Change the thread color display on the “Embroidery” screen; thread number, color name. (page B-67).
A When the thread number “#123” is selected, select from six thread brands. (page B-67).
B Adjust the maximum embroidery speed setting. For details, refer to “Adjusting the embroidery speed” in the “Embroidering”
section.
C Change the display units (mm/inch).
D Adjust the upper thread tension for embroidering. For details, refer to “Adjusting thread tension” in the “Embroidering” section.
E Press to specify the size of pattern thumbnails. For details, refer to “Specifying the size of pattern thumbnails” in the
“Embroidering” section.
F Change the color of the background for the embroidery display area. For details, refer to “Changing the background colors of the
embroidery patterns” in the “Embroidering” section.
G Change the color of the background for the thumbnail area. For details, refer to “Changing the background colors of the
embroidery patterns” in the “Embroidering” section.
Page 1 Page 2
Page 3 Page 4 Page 5
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
8
7
0
A
B
C
D
E
G
F
LCD Operation
B-14
General settings
H Select the needle stop position (the needle position for when the machine is not being operated) to be up or down.
I Select whether to hear the beep operation sound. For details, refer to “Operation beep” in the “Appendix” section.
J Select whether to display the opening screen when the machine is turned on.
K Select the display language. (page B-15)
L Select whether to turn on the light for the needle area and work area.
M Select the level of the input sensitivity for operation keys. (page B-15)
N Display the service count which is a reminder to take your machine in for regular servicing. (Contact your authorized Brother
dealer for details.)
O Display the total number of stitches sewn on this machine.
P The “No.” is the internal machine number for your machine.
Q Display the program version of the LCD panel.
Page 6 Page 7 Page 8
The latest version of software is installed in your machine. Check with your local authorized Brother dealer or at
“ http://support.brother.com/
” for available updates. For details, refer toUpgrading your machine’s software using
USB flash drive” in the “Appendix” section.
Press to save the current settings screen image to USB flash drive. (page B-16)
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
Q
P
LCD Operation
GETTING READY
Basic operations B-15
B
Choosing the display language
a
Press .
b
Display page 6.
c
Use and to choose the display language.
1 Display language
d
Press to return to the original screen.
Adjusting input sensitivity for operation keys
You can adjust the sensitivity of the operation keys to five
levels. Display the settings screen to set desired level.
1 Operation keys
a
Press to display the settings screen.
b
Display page 7 by pressing / .
c
Press “Start”.
The adjusting screen is displayed.
d
Adjust the “Input Sensitivity” by pressing / .
The higher the setting, the more sensitive the keys
will be. The default setting is “3”.
e
Press to return to previous screen.
If the machine does not respond when an
operation key is pressed
Turn machine off, then hold down (Thread cutter
button) and turn on the machine to reset the settings.
Display the settings screen, and then adjust the settings
again.
1
1
Note
We recommend selecting the highest setting if
an electrostatic touch pen is being used.
While adjusting the input sensitivity, press
to check the sensitivity.
When the key responds, the setting value
indicating the sensitivity blinks.
LCD Operation
B-16
Saving a settings screen image to USB flash
drive
An image of the settings screen can be saved as a BMP file.
a
Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port on the
right side of the machine.
1 USB port
2 USB flash drive
b
Press .
The settings screen appears. Select the settings screen
page, make the changes that you want, and then save
the screen image.
c
Press .
The image file will be saved to the USB flash drive.
d
Remove the USB flash drive, and then for future
reference, check the saved image using a computer.
The files for settings screen images are saved with the
name “S######.bmp” in a folder labeled “bPocket”.
Checking machine operating procedures
a
Turn on the machine.
The LCD comes on.
b
Press anywhere on the LCD screen.
c
Press on the operation panel.
The machine help screen appears.
d
Press the item to be displayed.
1 Upper threading
2 Bobbin winding
3 Bobbin installation
4 Needle replacement
5 Embroidery unit attachment
6 Embroidery frame attachment
7 Embroidery foot attachment
8 Presser foot replacement
The first screen describing the procedure for the
selected topic appears.
Pressing , returns you to the item selection
screen.
e
Press to switch to the next page.
If you press , you return to the previous page.
f
After you have finished viewing, press two times.
4321
5 6 7 8
Winding/Installing the Bobbin
GETTING READY
Basic operations B-17
B
Winding the bobbin
This section describes how to wind thread onto a bobbin.
a
Open the top cover.
b
Place the bobbin on the bobbin winder shaft so that the
spring on the shaft fits into the notch in the bobbin
.
Press down on the bobbin until it snaps into place.
1 Notch
2 Bobbin winder shaft spring
c
Slide the bobbin winder in the direction of the arrow
until it snaps into place.
The “Start/Stop” button lights up in orange.
d
Remove the spool cap that is inserted onto the spool
pin.
1 Spool pin
2 Spool cap
e
Place the spool of thread for the bobbin onto the spool
pin.
Slide the spool onto the pin so that the spool is
horizontal and the thread unwinds to the front at the
bottom.
If the spool is not positioned so that the thread
unwinds correctly, the thread may become tangled
around the spool pin.
Winding/Installing the Bobbin
CAUTION
Only use the Bobbin (part code: SA156, SFB:
XA5539-151) designed specifically for this
machine. Use of any other bobbin may result
in injuries or damage to the machine.
The included bobbin was designed specifically
for this machine.
If bobbins from other models are used, the
machine will not operate correctly. Use only
the included bobbin or bobbins of the same
type (part code: SA156, SFB: XA5539-151).
SA156 is Class15 type bobbin.
* Made of plastic
1 This model
2 Other models
3 11.5 mm (approx. 7/16 inch)
Memo
When the foot controller is connected, bobbin
winding can be started and stopped with the foot
controller.
Memo
When winding bobbin for embroidery be sure to
use the recommended bobbin thread for this
machine.
2
1
1
2
Winding/Installing the Bobbin
B-18
f
Slide the spool cap onto the spool pin.
Slide the spool cap as far as possible to the right, as
shown, with the rounded side on the left.
CAUTION
If the spool or the spool cap is not installed
correctly, the thread may become tangled
around the spool pin, causing the needle to
break.
Three spool cap sizes are available, allowing
you to choose a spool cap that best fits the size
of spool being used. If the spool cap is too
small for the spool being used, the thread may
catch on the slit in the spool or the machine
may be damaged. When using mini king thread
spool, use the thread spool insert (mini king
thread spool).
For details on thread spool insert (mini king
thread spool), refer to “Memo” on page B-18.
Memo
When using the spool as shown below, use the
small spool cap, and leave a small space between
the cap and the spool.
1 Spool cap (small)
2 Spool (cross-wound thread)
3 Space
When using thread that winds off quickly, such as
transparent nylon thread or metallic thread, place
the spool net over the spool before placing the
spool of thread onto the spool pin.
If the spool net is too long, fold it to fit the size of
the spool.
1 Spool net
2 Spool
3 Spool cap
4 Spool pin
If a spool of thread whose core is 12 mm (1/2
inch) in diameter and 75 mm (3 inches) high is
inserted onto the spool pin, use the thread spool
insert (mini king thread spool).
1 Thread spool insert (mini king thread spool)
2 12 mm (1/2 inch)
3 75 mm (3 inches)
a
c
b
2
1
4
3
Winding/Installing the Bobbin
GETTING READY
Basic operations B-19
B
g
While holding the thread near the spool with your right
hand, as shown, pull the thread with your left hand,
and then pass the thread behind the thread guide cover
and to the front.
1 Thread guide cover
h
Pass the thread under the thread guide plate, and then
pull it to the right.
1 Thread guide plate
i
Pass the thread under the hook on the thread guide,
and then wind it counterclockwise under the
pretension disk.
1 Thread guide
2 Pretension disk
3 Pull it in as far as possible
j
While holding the thread with your left hand, wind the
thread that was pulled out clockwise around the
bobbin five or six times with your right hand.
k
Pass the end of the thread through the guide slit in the
bobbin winder seat, and then pull the thread to the
right to cut it.
1 Guide slit in bobbin winder seat
(with built-in cutter)
l
Slide the sewing speed controller to the right.
1 Speed controller
m
Turn on the machine.
Note
Make sure that the thread passes under the
pretension disk.
1
1
1
2
3
Note
Make sure that the thread between the spool and
the bobbin is pulled tight.
Be sure to wind the thread clockwise around the
bobbin, otherwise the thread will become
wrapped around the bobbin winder shaft.
CAUTION
Be sure to cut the thread as described. If the
bobbin is wound without cutting the thread
using the cutter built into the slit in the bobbin
winder seat, the thread may become tangled in
the bobbin or the needle may bend or break
when the bobbin thread starts to run out.
Note
Bobbin winding speeds may vary depending on
type of thread being wound on bobbin.
1
1
Winding/Installing the Bobbin
B-20
n
Press the “Start/Stop” button once to start winding the
bobbin.
When the foot controller is plugged in, press down on
the foot controller.
1 “Start/Stop” button
o
When the bobbin winding becomes slow, press the
“Start/Stop” button once to stop the machine.
When the foot controller is plugged in, remove your
foot from the foot controller.
p
Use scissors to cut the end of the thread wound around
the bobbin.
q
Slide the bobbin winder shaft to the left, and then
remove the bobbin from the shaft.
r
Slide the sewing speed controller to desired sewing
speed position.
s
Remove the spool for the bobbin thread from the spool
pin.
Installing the bobbin
Install the bobbin wound with thread.
You can begin sewing immediately without pulling up the
bobbin thread by simply inserting the bobbin in the bobbin
case and guiding the thread through the slit in the needle
plate cover.
Note
When winding transparent nylon thread on the
bobbin, stop bobbin winding when the bobbin is
1/2 to 2/3 full.
If the bobbin is fully wound with transparent
nylon thread, the pressure may create fractures
to the plastic bobbin. This will lead to irregular
stitches or possible breakage to bobbin.
CAUTION
When the bobbin winding becomes slow, stop
the machine, otherwise the machine may be
damaged.
1
Memo
If the bobbin winder shaft is set to the right side,
the needle will not move. (Sewing is impossible.)
Memo
When the machine is started or the handwheel is
turned after winding the bobbin, the machine will
make a clicking sound; this is not a malfunction.
Memo
For details on sewing after pulling up the bobbin
thread, for example, when making gathers or with
free motion quilting, refer to “Pulling up the
bobbin thread” on page B-27.
CAUTION
Use a bobbin that has been correctly wound
with thread, otherwise the needle may break
or the thread tension will be incorrect.
Before inserting or changing the bobbin, be
sure to press on the operation panel to
lock all keys and buttons, otherwise injuries
may occur if the “Start/Stop” button or any
other button is pressed and the machine starts.
Winding/Installing the Bobbin
GETTING READY
Basic operations B-21
B
a
Press (Needle position button) once or twice to
raise the needle.
b
Press .
The screen changes, and all keys and operation
buttons are locked (except ).
c
Raise the presser foot lever.
d
Slide the bobbin cover latch to the right.
1 Bobbin cover
2 Latch
e
Remove the bobbin cover.
f
Hold the bobbin with your right hand with the thread
unwinding to the left, and hold the end of the thread
with your left hand. Then, with your right hand, place
the bobbin in the bobbin case.
g
Lightly hold down the bobbin with your right hand
(1), and then guide the end of the thread around the
tab of the needle plate cover with your left hand (2).
1 Tab
h
While lightly holding down the bobbin with your right
hand (1), guide the thread through the slit in the
needle plate cover (2) and lightly pull it with your left
hand (3).
The thread enters the tension spring of the bobbin
case.
2
1
CAUTION
Be sure to hold down the bobbin with your
finger and unwind the bobbin thread
correctly, otherwise the thread may break or
the thread tension will be incorrect.
Memo
The order that the bobbin thread should be
passed through the bobbin case is indicated by
marks around the bobbin case. Be sure to thread
the machine as indicated.
Winding/Installing the Bobbin
B-22
i
While lightly holding down the bobbin with your right
hand (1), continue guiding the thread through the slit
with your left hand (2). Then, cut the thread with the
cutter (3).
j
Reattach the bobbin cover.
Insert the tab in the lower-left corner of the bobbin
cover, and then lightly press down on the right side.
The bobbin threading is finished.
Next, thread the upper thread. Continue with the
procedure in “Upper Threading” on page B-23.
k
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
Note
If the thread is not correctly inserted through the
tension-adjusting spring of the bobbin case, it
may cause incorrect thread tension.
1 Tension-adjusting spring
Memo
You can begin sewing without pulling up the
bobbin thread. If you wish to pull up the bobbin
thread before starting to sew, pull up the thread
according to the procedure in “Pulling up the
bobbin thread” on page B-27.
1
1
2
Upper Threading
GETTING READY
Basic operations B-23
B
Threading the upper thread
When threading the upper thread, carefully follow
the instructions.
a
Turn on the machine.
b
Raise the presser foot lever to raise the presser foot.
1 Presser foot lever
The upper thread shutter opens so the machine can
be threaded.
1 Shutter
c
Press (Needle position button) once or twice to
raise the needle.
1 Needle position button
The needle is correctly raised when the mark on the
handwheel is at the top, as shown below. Check the
handwheel and, if this mark is not at this position, press
(Needle position button) until it is.
1 Mark on handwheel
Upper Threading
CAUTION
Three spool cap sizes are available, allowing
you to choose a spool cap that best fits the size
of spool being used. If the spool cap is too
small for the spool being used, the thread may
catch on the slit in the spool or the needle may
break. When using mini king thread spool, use
the thread spool insert (mini king thread
spool). For more information regarding the
choice of spool caps for your thread choice,
see page B-18.
When threading the upper thread, carefully
follow the instructions. If the upper threading
is not correct, the thread may become tangled
or the needle may bend or break.
Never use a thread weight of 20 or lower.
Use the needle and the thread in the correct
combination. For details on the correct
combination of needles and threads, refer to
“Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations” on
page B-30.
Note
If the presser foot is not raised, the machine
cannot be threaded.
1
a
1
1
Upper Threading
B-24
d
Remove the spool cap that is inserted onto the spool
pin.
1 Spool pin
2 Spool cap
e
Place the spool of thread onto the spool pin.
Slide the spool onto the pin so that the spool is
horizontal and the thread unwinds to the front at the
bottom.
f
Slide the spool cap onto the spool pin.
Slide the spool cap as far as possible to the right, as
shown, with the rounded side on the left.
g
While holding the thread lightly with your right hand,
pull the thread with your left hand, and then pass the
thread behind the thread guide cover and to the front.
1 Thread guide cover
h
While holding the thread lightly with your right hand,
pass the thread under the thread guide plate, and then
pull it up.
1 Thread guide plate
i
Pass the thread through the thread channel in the order
shown below.
1 Shutter
j
Press .
The screen changes, and all keys and operation
buttons are locked (except ).
CAUTION
If the spool or the spool cap is not positioned
correctly, the thread may become tangled
around the spool pin or the needle may break.
1
2
1
Note
If the presser foot has been lowered and the
shutter is closed, the machine cannot be
threaded. Be sure to raise the presser foot to
open the shutter before threading the machine.
In addition, before removing the upper thread, be
sure to raise the presser foot to open the shutter.
This machine is equipped with a window that
allows you to check the position of the take-up
lever. Look through this window and check that
the thread is correctly fed through the take-up
lever.
1
Upper Threading
GETTING READY
Basic operations B-25
B
k
Slide the thread behind the needle bar thread guide.
The thread can easily be slid behind the needle bar
thread guide by holding the thread in your left hand,
then feeding the thread with your right hand, as shown.
Make sure that the thread is passed through to the left of
the tab of the needle bar thread guide.
1 Needle bar thread guide
2 Tab
l
Raise the presser foot lever.
Threading the needle
a
Pull the end of the thread, which has been passed
through the needle bar thread guide, to the left, then
pass the thread through the notch of the threader
thread guide a, and then firmly pull the thread from
the front and insert it into the slit of the threader
thread guide disk marked “7” all the way b.
Make sure that the thread passes through the notch of
the threader thread guide.
1 Notch of the threader thread guide
2 Threader thread guide disk
b
Cut the thread with the thread cutter on the left side of
the machine.
1 Cutter
c
Lower the presser foot lever to lower the presser foot.
1 Presser foot lever
Memo
The needle threader can be used with machine
needles 75/11 through 100/16.
The needle threader cannot be used with the wing
needle or the twin needle.
When thread such as transparent nylon
monofilament or specialty threads are used it is
not recommended to use the needle threader.
If the needle threader cannot be used, refer to
“Threading the needle manually (without using the
needle threader)” on page B-26.
1
2
2
1
a
b
Note
If the thread is pulled through and cannot be cut
correctly, lower the presser foot lever so that the
thread is held in place before cutting the thread.
If this operation is performed, skip step
c.
When using thread that quickly winds off the
spool, such as metallic thread, it may be difficult
to thread the needle if the thread is cut.
Therefore, instead of using the thread cutter, pull
out about 8 cm (approx. 3 inches) of thread after
passing it through the threader thread guide
disks (marked “7”).
1 8 cm (approx. 3 inches) or more
1
1
1
Upper Threading
B-26
d
Lower the needle threader lever on the left side of the
machine until it clicks, and then slowly return the lever
to its original position.
1 Hook
2 Needle threader lever
The hook is rotated and passes the thread through the
eye of the needle.
e
Carefully pull the end of thread that was passed
through the eye of the needle.
If the needle was not completely threaded, but a loop in
the thread was formed in the eye of the needle, carefully
pull the loop through the eye of the needle to pull out
the end of the thread.
f
Raise the presser foot lever, pass the end of the thread
through and under the presser foot, and then pull out
about 5 cm (approx. 2 inches) of thread toward the
rear of the machine.
1 5 cm (approx. 2 inches)
g
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
Threading the needle manually (without
using the needle threader)
When using specialty thread, such as transparent nylon
thread, a wing needle or a twin needle which cannot be used
with the needle threader, thread the needle as described
below.
a
Thread the machine to the needle bar thread guide.
For details, refer to “Threading the upper thread” on
page B-23.
b
Lower the presser foot lever.
1 Presser foot lever
c
Insert the thread through the eye of the needle from
front to back.
d
Raise the presser foot lever, pass the end of the thread
through and under the presser foot, and then pull out
about 5 cm (approx. 2 inches) of thread toward the
rear of the machine.
e
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
Note
If the needle is not raised to it's highest position,
the needle threader cannot thread the needle.
Turn handwheel counterclockwise until the
needle is at its highest position. The needle is
correctly raised when the mark on the handwheel
is at the top, as shown under step
c on
page B-23.
CAUTION
When pulling out the thread, do not pull it
with extreme force, otherwise the needle may
break or bend.
1
1
Upper Threading
GETTING READY
Basic operations B-27
B
Pulling up the bobbin thread
When making gathers or before free motion quilting, first pull
up the bobbin thread as described below.
a
Refer to “Threading the upper thread” (page B-23) to
thread the machine with the upper thread and thread
the needle.
b
Follow steps d to f “Installing the bobbin” (page B-
20) for installing the bobbin to insert the bobbin into
the bobbin case.
c
Pass the bobbin thread through the slot.
Do not cut the thread with the cutter.
d
While lightly holding the upper thread with your left
hand, press (Needle position button) twice to
lower and then raise the needle.
The bobbin thread is looped around the upper thread
and can be pulled up.
e
Carefully pull the upper thread upward to pull out the
end of the bobbin thread.
f
Pull up the bobbin thread, pass it under the presser
foot and pull it about 10 cm (4 inches) toward the back
of the machine, making it even with the upper thread.
g
Reattach the bobbin cover.
Insert the tab in the lower-left corner of the bobbin
cover, and then lightly press down on the right side.
Using the twin needle
With the twin needle, you can sew two parallel lines of the
same stitch with two different threads. Both upper threads
should have the same thickness and quality. Be sure to use the
twin needle, the horizontal spool pin and the appropriate
spool caps.
For details on the stitches that can be sewn with the twin
needle, refer to “Stitch Setting Chart” beginning on page B-46.
a
Press and install the twin needle.
The screen changes, and all keys and operation
buttons are locked (except ).
For details on installing a needle, refer to “Replacing
the needle” on page B-31.
Memo
Traditionally a twin needle is also used for creating
pin tucks. Contact your nearest authorized
Brother dealer to obtain the optional pin tuck foot
for your machine (SA194, F069: XF5832-001).
CAUTION
Only use the twin needle (2/11 needle, part
code: X59296-121). Use of any other needle
may bend the needle or damage the machine.
Never use bent needles. Bent needles can
easily break, possibly resulting in injuries.
The needle threader cannot be used with the
twin needle. If the needle threader is used with
the twin needle, the machine may be
damaged.
1
2
Upper Threading
B-28
b
Thread the upper thread for the left needle eye.
For details, refer to steps
a through k of
“Threading the upper thread” on page B-23.
c
Manually thread the left needle with the upper thread.
Pass the thread through the eye of the needle from the
front.
d
Insert the horizontal spool pin onto the bobbin winder
shaft.
Insert the spool pin so that it is perpendicular to the
bobbin winder shaft.
1 Bobbin winder shaft
e
Swing the spool pin toward the left so that it is
horizontal.
f
Place the upper thread spool for the needle on the right
side onto the spool pin, and then secure it with the
spool cap.
The thread should unwind from the front at the bottom
of the spool.
1 Spool cap
2 Spool
g
Thread the upper thread in the same way that the
upper thread for the left side was threaded.
1 Thread guide cover
For details, refer to steps g through i of
“Threading the upper thread” on page B-23.
h
Without passing the thread through the needle bar
thread guide, manually thread the right needle.
Insert the thread through the eye of the needle from the
front to the back.
The needle threader cannot be used with the twin
needle. If the needle threader is used with the twin
needle, the machine may be damaged.
i
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
For details on changing the presser foot, refer to
“Replacing the presser foot” on page B-33.
j
Press to unlock all keys and buttons, and then
select a stitch.
For stitch selection see “Sewing a stitch” on page B-
36.
See “Stitch Setting Chart” on page B-46 for stitches
that use a twin needle.
k
Press to display the settings screen.
1
12
CAUTION
When using the twin needle, be sure to attach
zigzag foot “J”. If bunched stitches occur, use
monogramming foot “N” or attach stabilizer
material.
CAUTION
When using the twin needle, be sure to select
an appropriate stitch, otherwise the needle
may break or the machine may be damaged.
1
Upper Threading
GETTING READY
Basic operations B-29
B
l
Set “Twin Needle” to “ON.”
m
Press .
n
Start sewing.
For details on starting to sew, refer to “STARTING TO
SEW” on page B-36.
Two lines of stitching are sewn parallel to each other.
CAUTION
When using the twin needle, be sure to select
the twin needle setting, otherwise the needle
may break or the machine may be damaged.
Note
When changing the sewing direction, press
(Needle position button) to raise the needle from
the fabric, and then raise the presser foot lever
and turn the fabric.
CAUTION
Do not try turning the fabric while the twin
needle is down in the fabric, otherwise the
needle may break or the machine may be
damaged.
Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations
B-30
Needles that can be used with this machine: Home sewing machine needles (size 65/9 - 100/16)
* The larger the number, the larger the needle. As the numbers decrease, the needles get finer.
Thread that can be used with this machine: 30 - 90 weight
* Never use thread of 20 weight or lower. It may cause machine to malfunction.
* The smaller the number, the heavier the thread. As the numbers increase, the thread gets finer.
The machine needle and thread that should be used depends on the type and thickness of the fabric. Refer to
the following table when choosing the thread and needle appropriate for the fabric that you wish to sew.
- The combinations shown in the table provide a general guideline. Be sure to sew trial stitches on the actual number of
layers and type of fabric to be used in your project.
- The machine needles are consumables. For safety and best results, we recommend replacing the needle regularly. For
details on when to replace the needle, refer to “Checking the needle” on page B-31.
In principle, use a fine needle and thread with lightweight fabrics, and a larger needle and heavier thread with
heavyweight fabrics.
Select a stitch appropriate for the fabric, and then adjust the stitch length. When sewing lightweight fabrics,
make the stitch length finer (shorter). When sewing heavyweight fabrics, make the stitch length coarser
(longer). (page B-41)
When sewing stretch fabrics, refer to “Sewing stretch fabrics” in the “Sewing” section.
Transparent nylon thread
Use a home sewing machine topstitching needle, regardless of the fabric or thread.
Embroidery needles
Use a 75/11 home sewing machine needle for embroidery.
Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations
Fabric Type/Application
Thread
Size of needle
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Type Weight
Lightweight
fabrics
Lawn, georgette, challis, organdy,
crepe, chiffon, voile, gauze, tulle,
lining, etc.
Polyester
thread
60 - 90
65/9 - 75/11
Fine stitches
1.8-2.5
(1/16-3/32)
Cotton thread,
Silk thread
50 - 80
Medium weight
fabrics
Broadcloth, taffeta, gabardine,
flannel, seersucker, double gauze,
linen, terry cloth, waffle weave,
sheeting, poplin, cotton twill, satin,
quilting cotton, etc.
Polyester
thread
60 - 90
75/11 - 90/14
Regular stitches
2.0-3.0
(1/16-1/8)
Cotton thread,
Silk thread
50 - 60
Heavyweight
fabrics
Denim (12 ounces or more), canvas,
etc.
Polyester
thread,
Cotton thread
30 100/16
Coarse stitches
2.5-4.0
(3/32-3/16)
Denim (12 ounces or more), canvas,
tweed, corduroy, velour, melton
wool, vinyl-coated fabric, etc.
Polyester
thread
60
90/14 - 100/16
Cotton thread,
Silk thread
30 - 50
Stretch fabrics
(knit fabrics, etc.)
Jersey, tricot, T-shirt fabric, fleece,
interlock, etc.
Cotton thread,
Polyester thread,
Silk thread
50
Ball point needle
75/11 - 90/14
Setting appropriate for
the fabric thickness
For top-stitching
Polyester thread,
Cotton thread
30 90/14 - 100/16
Setting appropriate for
the fabric thickness
50 - 60 75/11 - 90/14
CAUTION
The appropriate fabric, thread and needle combinations are shown in the preceding table. If the
combination of the fabric, thread and needle is not correct, particularly when sewing heavy fabrics (such
as denim) with thin needles (such as 65/9 to 75/11), the needle may bend or break. In addition, the
stitching may be uneven or puckered or there may be skipped stitches.
Replacing the Needle
GETTING READY
Basic operations B-31
B
Be sure to observe the following precautions concerning the
handling of the needle. Failure to observe these precautions is
extremely dangerous, for example, if the needle breaks and
fragments are dispersed. Be sure to read and carefully follow
the instructions below.
Checking the needle
Sewing with a bent needle is extremely dangerous since the
needle may break while the machine is being operated.
Before using the needle, place the flat side of the needle on a
flat surface and check that the distance between the needle
and the flat surface is even.
1 Flat side
2 Needle type marking
Replacing the needle
Use the screwdriver and a needle that has been determined to
be straight according to the instructions in “Checking the
needle”.
a
Press (Needle position button) once or twice to
raise the needle.
b
Place fabric or paper under the presser foot to cover
the hole in the needle plate.
c
Press .
The screen changes, and all keys and operation
buttons are locked (except ).
Replacing the Needle
CAUTION
Only use recommended home sewing machine
needles. Use of any other needle may bend the
needle or damage the machine.
Never use bent needles. Bent needles can
easily break, possibly resulting in injuries.
CAUTION
If the distance between the needle and the flat
surface is not even, the needle is bent. Do not
use a bent needle.
1 Flat surface
1
2
1
1
Note
Replace the needle in cases such as the four
described below:
1 If an unusual sound is produced when the needle
enters the fabric while sewing trial stitches at low
speed. (The tip of the needle may be broken.)
2 If stitches are skipped. (The needle may be bent.)
3 After completing one project, such as a piece of
clothing.
4 After using three full bobbins of thread.
Note
Before replacing the needle, cover the hole in the
needle plate with fabric or paper to prevent the
needle from falling into the machine.
Replacing the Needle
B-32
d
Hold the needle with your left hand, and then use a
screwdriver to turn the needle clamp screw toward
you (counterclockwise) to remove the needle.
The needle clamp screw can also be loosened or
tightened with the disc-shaped screwdriver.
1 Screwdriver
2 Needle clamp screw
Do not apply a strong force when loosening or
tightening the needle clamp screw, otherwise certain
parts of the machine may be damaged.
e
With the flat side of the needle toward the rear of the
machine, insert the needle until it touches the needle
stopper.
1 Needle stopper
f
While holding the needle with your left hand, use the
screwdriver to tighten the needle clamp screw by
turning it clockwise.
g
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
CAUTION
Be sure to insert the needle until it touches the
needle stopper and securely tighten the needle
clamp screw with the screwdriver, otherwise
the needle may break or damage may result.
2
1
1
Replacing the Presser Foot
GETTING READY
Basic operations B-33
B
Replacing the presser foot
a
Press (Needle position button) once or twice to
raise the needle.
b
Press .
The screen changes, and all keys and operation
buttons are locked (except ).
c
Raise the presser foot lever.
d
Press the black button at the back of the presser foot
holder in order to remove the presser foot.
1 Black button
2 Presser foot holder
e
Place a different presser foot below the holder so that
the presser foot pin is aligned with the notch in the
holder.
1 Presser foot holder
2 Notch
3 Pin
4 Presser foot type
f
Slowly lower the presser foot lever so that the presser
foot pin snaps into the notch in the presser foot holder.
1 Presser foot lever
2 Presser foot holder
3 Notch
4 Pin
The presser foot is attached.
g
Raise the presser foot lever to check that the presser
foot is securely attached.
1 Presser foot lever
h
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
Replacing the Presser Foot
CAUTION
Use the presser foot appropriate for the type
of stitch that you wish to sew, otherwise the
needle may hit the presser foot, causing the
needle to bend or break.
Only use presser feet designed specifically for
this machine. Use of any other presser foot
may result in injuries or damage to the
machine.
a
b
1
2
3
4
J
2
3
4
1
1
Replacing the Presser Foot
B-34
Removing and attaching the presser foot
holder
Remove the presser foot holder when cleaning the machine or
when installing a presser foot that does not use the presser
foot holder, such as the walking foot and quilting foot. Use
the screwdriver to remove the presser foot holder.
a
Press .
The screen changes, and all keys and operation
buttons are locked (except ).
b
Remove the presser foot.
For details, refer to “Replacing the presser foot” on
page B-33.
c
Use the screwdriver to loosen the presser foot holder
screw.
Turn the screw toward the back of the machine
(counterclockwise).
The presser foot holder screw can also be loosened
or tightened with the disc-shaped screwdriver.
1 Screwdriver
2 Presser foot holder
3 Presser foot holder screw
Attaching the presser foot holder
a
Press .
The screen changes, and all keys and operation
buttons are locked (except ).
b
Raise the presser foot lever.
c
Align the presser foot holder with the lower-left side of
the presser bar.
Note
When a stitch is selected, the icon for the presser
foot that should be used appears in the screen.
Check that the correct presser foot is attached
before starting to sew. If the wrong presser foot
is installed, turn off the machine, attach the
appropriate presser foot.
Zigzag foot “J”
Monogramming foot “N”
Overcasting foot “G
Buttonhole foot “A
Blind stitch foot “R”
Button fitting foot “M”
Side cutter “S”
For details on the presser foot that should be
used with the selected stitch, refer to “Stitch
Setting Chart” beginning on page B-46.
13
2
Replacing the Presser Foot
GETTING READY
Basic operations B-35
B
d
Hold the presser foot holder in place with your right
hand, and then tighten the screw using the screwdriver
in your left hand.
Turn the screw toward you (clockwise).
1 Screwdriver
CAUTION
Be sure to securely tighten the presser foot
holder screw, otherwise the presser foot
holder may fall off and the needle may strike
it, causing the needle to bend or break.
Note
If the presser foot holder is not correctly
installed, the thread tension will be incorrect.
1
Sewing
B-36
Stitch types
For details on sewing and storing the stitches 2
through A, refer to “Decorative sewing” section.
Sewing a stitch
a
Turn the main power to ON and display the stitch
selection screen in (icon) category, and press
(Needle position button) to raise the needle.
If you want to sew any stitch in category,
proceed to step 4.
b
Press on the operation panel.
c
Select the stitch type.
d
Press the stitch selection.
displays the previous screen, and displays the
next screen.
For details on the key functions, refer to “Viewing the
LCD” on page B-11.
Chapter 2
STARTING TO SEW
Sewing
CAUTION
While the machine is in operation, pay special
attention to the needle location. In addition,
keep your hands away from all moving parts
such as the needle and handwheel, otherwise
injuries may occur.
Do not pull or push the fabric too hard while
sewing, otherwise injuries may occur or the
needle may break.
Never use bent needles. Bent needles can
easily break, possibly resulting in injuries.
Make sure that the needle does not strike
basting pins, otherwise the needle may break
or bend.
1 Utility stitches
You can select from utility stitches, including straight
line stitching, overcasting, buttonhole and basic
decorative stitches.
For details on the various stitches, refer to “Stitch
Setting Chart” beginning on page B-46.
2 Decorative stitches
3 Satin stitches
4 7 mm satin stitches
5 Cross stitch stitches
6 Utility decorative stitches
7 Character stitches
8 MY CUSTOM STITCH
You can design original stitches. For details, refer to
“Designing a Stitch” in the “Decorative sewing” section.
9 MY CUSTOM STITCH stored in the machine's memory
or USB flash drive
MY CUSTOM STITCH recalled from machine's memory
or USB flash drive can be sewn.
0 Patterns stored in the machine's memory
Patterns recalled from machine's memory can be sewn.
A Patterns stored in USB flash drive
Patterns recalled from the USB flash drive can be sewn.
1
6
2
3
7 8 9
5
4 0 A
Sewing
Basic operations B-37
STARTING TO SEW
B
e
If necessary, specify the setting for automatic reverse/
reinforcement stitching and adjust the stitch length,
etc.
For details on adjusting the stitch width and length,
refer to “Setting the stitch width” on page B-41 and
“Setting the stitch length” on page B-41.
f
Install the presser foot.
For details on changing the presser foot, refer to
“Replacing the presser foot” on page B-33.
g
Set the fabric under the presser foot. Hold the fabric
and thread with your left hand, and rotate the
handwheel counterclockwise or press (Needle
position button) to set the needle in the sewing start
position.
h
Lower the presser foot.
You do not have to pull up the bobbin thread.
i
Adjust the sewing speed with the sewing speed
controller.
You can use this controller to adjust sewing speed
during sewing.
1 Fast
2 Slow
j
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start sewing.
Guide the fabric lightly by hand.
k
Press the “Start/Stop” button again to stop sewing.
l
Press (Thread cutter button) to trim the upper and
lower threads.
1 Thread cutter button
The needle will return to the up position
automatically.
Note
When a stitch is selected, the icon for the
presser foot that should be used appears on the
screen. Check that the correct presser foot is
attached before starting to sew. If the wrong
presser foot is installed, attach the appropriate
presser foot.
CAUTION
Always use the correct presser foot. If the
wrong presser foot is used, the needle may
strike the presser foot and bend or break,
possibly resulting in injury.
Refer to page B-46 for presser foot
recommendations.
Memo
The black button on the left side of zigzag foot
“J” should be pressed only if the fabric does not
feed or when sewing thick seams. For details,
refer to “Sewing thick fabrics” in the “Sewing”
section. Normally, you can sew without pressing
the black button.
Memo
When the foot controller is being used, you
cannot start sewing by pressing the “Start/Stop”
button.
b
a
1
Sewing
B-38
m
When the needle has stopped moving, raise the presser
foot and remove the fabric.
Using the foot controller
You can also use the foot controller to start and stop
sewing.
a
Turn off the machine.
b
Insert the foot controller plug into its jack on the
machine.
1 Foot controller jack
c
Turn on the machine.
d
Slowly depress the foot controller to start sewing.
e
Release the foot controller to stop the machine.
CAUTION
Do not press (Thread cutter button) after
the threads have been cut. Doing so could
tangle the thread or break the needle and
damage the machine.
Do not press (Thread cutter button) when
there is no fabric set in the machine or during
machine operation. The thread may tangle,
possibly resulting in damage.
Note
When cutting thread such as nylon monofilament
thread, or other decorative threads, use the
thread cutter on the side of the machine.
Memo
This machine is equipped with a bobbin thread
sensor that warns you when the bobbin thread is
almost empty. When the bobbin thread is nearly
empty, the machine automatically stops.
However, if the “Start/Stop” button is pressed, a
few stitches can be sewn. When the warning
displays, replace with a wound bobbin
immediately.
CAUTION
Do not allow fabric pieces and dust to collect
in the foot controller. Doing so could cause a
fire or an electric shock.
Memo
When the foot controller is being used, you
cannot start sewing by pressing the “Start/Stop”
button.
Bobbin winding can be started and stopped with
the foot controller.
The foot controller cannot be used when
embroidering.
Memo
The speed that is set using the sewing speed
controller will be the foot controller’s maximum
sewing speed.
1
Sewing
Basic operations B-39
STARTING TO SEW
B
Sewing reinforcement stitches
Reverse/reinforcement stitches are generally necessary at the
beginning and end of sewing. You can use (Reverse stitch
button) to sew reverse/reinforcement stitches. Refer to “Stitch
Setting Chart” under the column for “Reverse button” on
page B-46.
While pressing
(Reinforcement stitch button), the machine
will sew 3 to 5 reinforcement stitches at that point and then
stop.
1 Reverse stitch button
2 Reinforcement stitch button
If the automatic reinforcement stitch is selected, reverse
stitches (or reinforcement stitches) will be sewn automatically
at the beginning of sewing when the “Start/Stop” button is
pressed. Press (Reverse stitch button) or
(Reinforcement stitch button) to sew reverse stitches or
reinforcement stitches automatically at the end of sewing.
1 Reverse stitch
2 Reinforcement stitch
The operation performed when the button is pressed differs
depending on the selected pattern. Refer to the table in
“Automatic reinforcement stitching” on page B-39.
Automatic reinforcement stitching
After selecting a stitch motif, turn on the automatic
reinforcement stitching function before sewing, and the
machine will automatically sew reinforcement stitches (or
reverse stitches, depending on the stitch motif) at the
beginning and end of sewing. Refer to the table on page B-40.
a
Select a stitch pattern.
b
Press to set the automatic reinforcement stitching
function.
The key will display as .
c
Set the fabric in the start position and begin sewing.
1 Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
The machine will automatically sew reverse stitches
(or reinforcement stitches) and then continue sewing.
Memo
While pressing (Reinforcement stitch button)
when sewing character/decorative stitch pattern,
you can end sewing with a completed motif
instead of at the midpoint of a stitch motif.
The green light on the left of (Reinforcement
stitch button) lights up while the machine is
sewing a full motif, and it automatically turns off
when the sewing is stopped.
1 2
Memo
Some stitches, such as buttonholes and bar
tacks, require reinforcement stitches at the
beginning of sewing. If you select one of these
stitches, the machine will automatically turn on
this function (the key appears as when the
stitch is selected).
Memo
When selecting the stitches below, the machine
will automatically sew reverse stitches at the
beginning of the stitch.
If you press the “Start/Stop” button to pause
sewing, press it again to continue. The machine
will not sew reverse/reinforcement stitches again.
Sewing
B-40
d
Press (Reverse stitch button) or (Reinforcement
stitch button).
1 Reverse stitches (or reinforcement stitches)
The machine will sew reverse stitches (or
reinforcement stitches) and stop.
The operation performed when the button is pressed differs
depending on the selected pattern. Refer to the following table
for details on the operation that is performed when the button
is pressed.
* If “Reinforcement Priority” on page 2 of the settings screen
is set to “ON”, reinforcement stitches are sewn instead of
reverse stitches.
Memo
To turn off the automatic reinforcement stitching
function, press again, so it appears as .
Reverse stitch
button
Reinforcement
stitch button
When the automatic
reinforcement
stitching function is
not active while
selecting stitches
such as examples
shown below:
Machine starts
sewing the stitches
and only sews
reverse stitches
while holding the
Reverse stitch
button.
Machine sews 3 - 5
reinforcement
stitches while
holding the
Reinforcement stitch
button.
When the automatic
reinforcement
stitching function is
active while selecting
stitches such as
examples shown
below:
Machine sews
reverse stitches at
the beginning and
end of sewing.
Machine sews
reverse stitches at
the beginning and
reinforcement
stitches at the end of
sewing.
When the automatic
reinforcement
stitching function is
not active while
selecting stitches
such as examples
shown below:
Machine starts
sewing the stitches
and only sews
reverse stitches
while holding the
Reverse stitch
button.
*
Machine starts
sewing the stitches
and sews 3 - 5
reinforcement
stitches while
holding the
Reinforcement stitch
button.
When the automatic
reinforcement
stitching function is
active while selecting
stitches such as
examples shown
below:
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches at the
beginning and
reverse stitches at
the end of sewing.
*
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches at the
beginning and end of
sewing.
When the automatic
reinforcement
stitching function is
not active while
selecting utility
stitches other than
the straight or zigzag
stitches.
Machine sews 3 - 5
reinforcement
stitches while
holding the Reverse
stitch button.
Machine sews 3 - 5
reinforcement
stitches while
holding the
Reinforcement stitch
button.
When the automatic
reinforcement
stitching function is
active while selecting
utility stitches other
than the straight or
zigzag stitches.
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches at the
beginning and end of
sewing.
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches at the
beginning and end of
sewing.
When the automatic
reinforcement
stitching function is
not active while
selecting character/
decorative stitches.
Machine starts
sewing and then
sews reinforcement
stitches while
holding the Reverse
stitch button.
Machine starts
sewing at the
beginning, then
completes the
pattern when the
Reinforcement stitch
button is pressed
and sews
reinforcement
stitches at the end of
sewing.
When the automatic
reinforcement
stitching function is
active while selecting
character/decorative
stitches.
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches at the
beginning and sews
reinforcement
stitches when the
Reverse stitch
button is pressed.
Machine sews
reinforcement
stitches at the
beginning, then
completes the
pattern when the
Reinforcement stitch
button is pressed
and sews
reinforcement
stitches at the end of
sewing.
Reverse stitch
button
Reinforcement
stitch button
Setting the Stitch
Basic operations B-41
STARTING TO SEW
B
This machine is preset with the default settings for the
stitch width, stitch length, “L/R Shift”, and upper thread
tension for each stitch. However, you can change any of
the settings by pressing in the utility stitch screen, then
following the procedure described in this section.
After changing the settings, press to return to the utility
stitch screen.
Setting the stitch width
The stitch width (zigzag width) can be adjusted to make the
stitch wider or narrower.
Each press of makes the zigzag stitch narrower.
Each press of
makes the zigzag stitch wider.
Setting the stitch length
The stitch length can be adjusted to make the stitch coarser
(longer) or finer (shorter).
Each press of
makes the stitch length finer (shorter).
Each press of makes the stitch length coarser (longer).
Setting the Stitch
Note
Stitch settings return to their defaults if they are
changed, when the machine is turned off or a
different stitch is selected before the stitch
setting is saved, refer to “Saving stitch settings”
on page B-43.
Memo
Press to return the setting to its default.
If the straight stitch or triple stretch stitch was
selected, changing the stitch width changes the
needle position. Increasing the width moves the
needle to the right; reducing the width moves the
needle to the left.
means the setting cannot be adjusted.
CAUTION
After adjusting the stitch width, slowly turn
the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise)
and check that the needle does not touch the
presser foot. If the needle hits the presser foot,
the needle may bend or break.
Memo
Press to return the setting to its default.
means the setting cannot be adjusted.
Setting the Stitch
B-42
Setting the “L/R Shift”
Follow the steps below when you want to change the
placement of the zigzag stitch pattern by moving it left and
right.
Press to shift the pattern to the left.
The value in the display appears with a minus sign.
Press to shift the pattern to the right side of the left needle
position.
The value in the display appears with a plus sign.
Setting the thread tension
You may need to change the thread tension, depending on the
fabric and thread being used.
Correct thread tension
The upper thread and the bobbin thread should cross near
the center of the fabric. Only the upper thread should be
visible from the right side of the fabric, and only the
bobbin thread should be visible from the wrong side of the
fabric.
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Right side of fabric
3 Upper thread
4 Bobbin thread
Upper thread is too tight
If the bobbin thread is visible from the right side of the
fabric, the upper thread is too tight.
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Right side of fabric
3 Upper thread
4 Bobbin thread
5 The bobbin thread is visible from the right side of the
fabric.
Each press of makes the thread tension looser.
Memo
Press to return the setting to its default.
means the setting cannot be adjusted.
CAUTION
After adjusting the “L/R Shift”, slowly rotate
the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise)
and check that the needle does not touch the
presser foot. If the needle hits the presser foot,
the needle may bend or break.
If the stitches are bunched together, increase
the stitch length. Continuing to sew with the
stitches bunched together may result in the
needle bending or breaking.
Note
If the bobbin thread was incorrectly threaded, the
upper thread may be too tight. In this case, refer
to “Installing the bobbin” on page B-20 and
rethread the bobbin thread.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
Setting the Stitch
Basic operations B-43
STARTING TO SEW
B
Upper thread is too loose
If the upper thread is visible from the wrong side of the
fabric, the upper thread is too loose.
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Right side of fabric
3 Upper thread
4 Bobbin thread
5 The upper thread is visible from the wrong side of the
fabric.
Each press of makes the thread tension tighter.
Saving stitch settings
If you wish to save specific settings for a stitch so that they can
be used later, press after changing the settings to save the
new settings with the selected stitch.
This feature can be used only with utility stitches.
To use a stitch length of 2.0 mm for the straight stitch
a
Select a straight stitch.
b
Press .
c
Set the stitch length to 2.0 mm.
d
Press .
To reset the selected stitch pattern back to its default
settings, press , and then press .
e
Press .
The original screen is displayed.
Note
If the upper thread was incorrectly threaded, the
upper thread may be too loose. In this case, refer
to “Upper Threading” on page B-23 and rethread
the upper thread.
Note
If the upper thread is not threaded correctly or
the bobbin is not installed correctly, it may not
be possible to set the correct thread tension. If
the correct thread tension cannot be achieved,
rethread the upper thread and insert the bobbin
correctly.
5
1
2
3
4
Note
The next time that the same straight stitch is
selected, the stitch length is set to 2.0 mm.
All stitch settings (stitch width (zigzag width),
stitch length, L/R shift, thread tension) are saved,
not just the setting that was changed. When the
same stitch pattern is selected, the last settings
saved are displayed even if the machine was
turned off. If the settings are changed again, or if
is pressed to reset the setting to its default,
the new settings are not saved unless is
pressed another time.
Even if is pressed, the settings for
programmed thread cutting and automatic
reverse/reinforcement stitching cannot be reset.
Useful Functions
B-44
Automatically cutting the thread
The machine can be set to automatically cut the threads at the
end of the stitching. This is called “programmed thread
cutting”. If programmed thread cutting is set, automatic
reverse/reinforcement stitching is also set.
a
Turn on the machine.
b
Select a stitch.
For details on selecting a stitch, refer to “Sewing a
stitch” on page B-36.
c
Press on the screen.
You get
, and the machine is set for
programmed thread cutting and automatic reverse/
reinforcement stitching.
To turn programmed thread cutting off, press .
d
Set the fabric in place, and press the “Start/Stop
button once.
Stitching will begin after reverse stitches or
reinforcement stitches are sewn.
e
Once you have reached the end of the stitching, press
(Reverse stitch button) or (Reinforcement stitch
button) once.
If stitching, such as buttonholes and bar tacking, that
includes reinforcement stitching has been selected, this
operation is unnecessary.
After the reverse stitching or reinforcement stitching
has been done, the machine stops, and the thread is
cut.
1 The point where the “Start/Stop” button was pressed.
2 The point where (Reverse stitch button) or
(Reinforcement stitch button) was pressed.
3 The thread is cut here.
Mirroring stitches
You can sew the mirror image of a stitch horizontally (left and
right).
a
Turn on the machine.
b
Select a stitch.
For details on selecting a stitch, refer to “Sewing a
stitch” on page B-36.
c
Press , and then on the screen.
It turns to , and the pattern displayed on the left
side of the screen is mirrored.
To turn the mirrored stitching off, press .
Useful Functions
32
1
Memo
Programmed thread cutting will not be performed
if the “Start/Stop” button is pressed while sewing.
Press (Reverse stitch button) or
(Reinforcement stitch button) at the end of the
stitching.
If the power is turned off, programmed thread
cutting will be turned off.
Memo
Mirroring is not possible when the mirroring icon
is grayed out on the editing screen. Certain
stitches, such as buttonholes, etc., cannot be
mirrored.
When the machine is turned off, the mirroring
setting is cancelled.
Useful Functions
Basic operations B-45
STARTING TO SEW
B
Adjusting the presser foot pressure
You can adjust the presser foot pressure (the amount of
pressure applied to the fabric by the presser foot) on the
settings screen. The higher the number, the greater the
pressure will be. Set the pressure at “3” for normal sewing.
a
Press to display the settings screen.
b
Display page 2.
c
Adjust the “Presser Foot Pressure” by pressing / .
Hands-free raising and lifting of the presser
foot
Using the knee lifter, you can raise and lower the presser foot
with your knee, leaving both hands free to handle the fabric.
Installing the knee lifter
a
Turn off the machine.
b
Insert the knee lifter into the mounting slot on the front
of the machine in the lower-right corner.
Align the tabs on the knee lifter with the notches in the
mounting slot, and then insert the knee lifter as far as
possible.
Using the knee lifter
a
Stop the machine.
Do not use the knee lifter while the machine is
operating.
b
With your knee, press the knee lifter to the right.
Keep the knee lifter pressed to the right.
The presser foot is raised.
c
Release the knee lifter.
The presser foot is lowered.
Note
If the knee lifter is not fully inserted into the
mounting slot, it may fall out while the machine is
operating.
CAUTION
While sewing, keep your knee away from the
knee lifter. If the knee lifter is pressed while
the machine is operating, the needle may
break or the machine may be damaged.
Stitch Setting Chart
B-46
Applications, stitch lengths and widths and whether the twin needle can be used are listed for utility stitches in the
following table.
*1
For free motion quilting, use free motion open toe quilting foot “O”.
*2
When the Automatic reverse/reinforcement key is activated, the stitch will begin with reinforcement stitch. If “Reinforcement
Priority” on page 2 of the settings screen is also set to “ON”, the machine will sew reinforcement stitches at the end of
stitching and then stop.
Stitch Setting Chart
The stitches shown in the table below may differ slightly from the stitch patterns displayed in the LCD.
The walking foot can only be used with straight or zigzag stitch patterns. Do not sew reverse stitches with the
walking foot.
Stitch
Stitch
number
Stitch name
Presser
foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Reverse
button
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
1-01
Straight stitch
(Left)
J
*1
General sewing, gather, pintuck,
etc.
0.0 (0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reverse
1-02
Straight stitch
(Left)
J
*1
General sewing, gather, pintuck,
etc.
0.0 (0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reverse
*2
1-03
Straight stitch
(Middle)
J
*1
General sewing, gather, pintuck,
etc.
3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reverse
1-04
Straight stitch
(Middle)
J
*1
General sewing, gather, pintuck,
etc.
3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
1-05
Triple stretch
stitch
J
*1
General sewing for reinforcement
and decorative topstitching
0.0 (0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
1-06
Stem stitch
J
*1
Reinforced stitching, sewing and
decorative applications
1.0 (1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
1-07
Decorative stitch
N
*1
Decorative stitching, top stitching 0.0 (0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
1-08
Basting stitch
J
*1
Basting 0.0 (0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
20 (3/4)
5 - 30
(3/16 - 1-3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
1-09
Zigzag stitch
J
*1
For overcasting, mending. 3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4 (1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reverse
1-10
Zigzag stitch
J
*1
For overcasting, mending. 3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4 (1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reverse
*2
1-11
Zigzag stitch
(Right)
J
*1
Start from right needle position,
zigzag sews to left.
3.5 (1/8)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.4 (1/16)
0.3 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reverse
*2
1-12
Zigzag stitch
(Left)
J
*1
Start from left needle position,
zigzag sew at right.
3.5 (1/8)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
1.4 (1/16)
0.3 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reverse
*2
1-13
2 steps elastic
zigzag stitch
J
*1
Overcasting (medium weight and
stretch fabrics), tape and elastic
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reverse
*2
1-14
3 steps elastic
zigzag stitch
J
*1
Overcasting (medium,
heavyweight and stretch fabrics),
tape and elastic
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reverse
*2
1-15
Overcasting
stitch G
Reinforcing of light and medium
weight fabrics
3.5 (1/8)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
Stitch Setting Chart
Basic operations B-47
STARTING TO SEW
B
1-16
Overcasting
stitch G
Reinforcing of heavyweight fabric 5.0 (3/16)
2.5 - 5.0
(3/32 - 3/16)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
1-17
Overcasting
stitch G
Reinforcing of medium,
heavyweight and easily friable
fabrics or decorative stitching.
5.0 (3/16)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
1-18
Overcasting
stitch
J
*1
Reinforced seaming of stretch
fabric
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
1-19
Overcasting
stitch
J
*1
Reinforcing of medium stretch
fabric and heavyweight fabric,
decorative stitching
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
1-20
Overcasting
stitch
J
*1
Reinforcement of stretch fabric or
decorative stitching
4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0 (3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
1-21
Overcasting
stitch
J
*1
Stretch knit seam 5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0 (3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
1-22
Single diamond
overcast stitch
J
*1
Reinforcement and seaming
stretch fabric
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
1-23
Single diamond
overcast stitch
J
*1
Reinforcement of stretch fabric 6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.8 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
1-24
With side cutter
S
Straight stitch while cutting
fabrics
0.0 (0)
0.0 - 2.5
(0 - 3/32)
2.5 (3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
1-25
With side cutter
S
Zigzag stitch while cutting fabrics 3.5 (1/8)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
1.4 (1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
1-26
With side cutter
S
Overcasting stitch while cutting
fabrics
3.5 (1/8)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
1-27
With side cutter
S
Overcasting stitch while cutting
fabrics
5.0 (3/16)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
1-28
With side cutter
S
Overcasting stitch while cutting
fabrics
5.0 (3/16)
3.5 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
1-29
Piecing stitch
(Right)
J
*1
Piecework/patchwork 6.5 mm
(approx. 1/4 inch) right seam
allowance
5.5 (7/32)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reverse
*2
1-30
Piecing stitch
(Middle)
J
*1
Piecework/patchwork
2.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reverse
*2
1-31
Piecing stitch
(Left)
J
*1
Piecework/patchwork 6.5 mm
(approx. 1/4 inch) left seam
allowance
1.5 (1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reverse
*2
1-32
Hand-look
quilting stitch
J
*1
Quilting stitch made to look like
hand quilting when using
transparent nylon thread for the
upper thread and a thread color
matching the quilt for the bobbin
thread.
Sew with a tight thread tension so
that the bobbin thread is visible
from the right side of the fabric.
Use a needle between 90/14 and
100/16.
0.0 (0)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
1-33
Quilting appliqué
zigzag stitch
J
*1
Zigzag stitch for quilting and
sewing on appliqué quilt pieces
3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4 (1/16)
0.0 - 5.0
(0 - 3/16)
NO
Reverse
*2
1-34
Quilting appliqué
stitch
J
*1
Quilting stitch for invisible
appliqué or attaching binding
1.5 (1/16)
0.0 - 3.5
(0 - 1/8)
1.8 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
1-35
Quilting stippling
stitch
J
*1
Background quilting 7.0 (1/4)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
Stitch
Stitch
number
Stitch name
Presser
foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Reverse
button
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
Stitch Setting Chart
B-48
2-01
Blind hem stitch
R
Hemming woven fabrics
00
3 - 3
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
2-02
Blind hem stretch
stitch R
Hemming stretch fabric
00
3 - 3
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
2-03
Blanket stitch
J
Appliqués, decorative blanket
stitch
3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
2-04
Shell tuck edge
stitch
J
*1
Shell tuck edge finish on fabrics 4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
2-05
Satin scallop
stitch
N
*1
Decorating collar of blouse, edge
of handkerchief
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
0.5 (1/32)
0.1 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
2-06
Scallop stitch
N
*1
Decorating collar of blouse, edge
of handkerchief
7.0 (1/4)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.4 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
2-07
Patchwork join
stitch
J
*1
Patchwork stitches, decorative
stitching
4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.2 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
2-08
Patchwork
double overlock
stitch
J
*1
Patchwork stitches, decorative
stitching
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
2-09
Couching stitch
J
*1
Decorative stitching, attaching
cord and couching
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.2 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
2-10
Smocking stitch
J
*1
Smocking, decorative stitching 5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
2-11
Feather stitch
J
*1
Fagoting, decorative stitching 5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
2-12
Fagoting cross
stitch
J
*1
Fagoting, bridging and decorative
stitching
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
2-13
Tape attaching
stitch
J
*1
Attaching tape to seam in stretch
fabric
4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
2-14
Ladder stitch
J
*1
Decorative stitching 4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
2-15
Rick-rack stitch
J
*1
Decorative top stitching 4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
2-16
Decorative stitch
J
*1
Decorative stitching 5.5 (7/32)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
2-17
Serpentine stitch
N
*1
Decorative stitching and
attaching elastic
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
2-18
Decorative stitch
N
*1
Decorative stitching and appliqué 6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
2-19
Decorative
stippling stitch
N
*1
Decorative stitching 7.0 (1/4)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
3-01
Hemstitching
N
*1
Decorative hems, triple straight at
left
1.0 (1/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
3-02
Hemstitching
N
*1
Decorative hems, triple straight at
center
3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
3-03
Hemstitching
zigzag
N
*1
Decorative hems, top stitching 6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
Stitch
Stitch
number
Stitch name
Presser
foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Reverse
button
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
Stitch Setting Chart
Basic operations B-49
STARTING TO SEW
B
3-04
Hemstitching
N
*1
Decorative hems, lace attaching
pin stitch
3.5 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
3-05
Hemstitching
N
*1
Decorative hems 3.0 (1/8)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
3-06
Hemstitching
N
*1
Decorative hems, daisy stitch 6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
3-07
Hemstitching
N
*1
Heirloom, decorative hems 5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
3-08
Hemstitching
N
*1
Heirloom, decorative hems 5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
3-09
Hemstitching
N
*1
Heirloom, decorative hems 5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
3-10
Hemstitching
N
*1
Heirloom, decorative hems 5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0 (3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
3-11
Hemstitching
N
*1
Heirloom, decorative hems 4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
3-12
Honeycomb
stitch
N
*1
Heirloom, decorative hems 5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
3-13
Honeycomb
stitch
N
*1
Heirloom, decorative hems 6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.5 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
3-14
Hemstitching
N
*1
Heirloom, decorative hems 6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
3-15
Hemstitching
N
*1
Heirloom, decorative hems 6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
3-16
Hemstitching
N
*1
Heirloom, decorative hems 6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
4.0 (3/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
3-17
Hemstitching
N
*1
Heirloom, decorative hems 4.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.5 (3/32)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
3-18
Hemstitching
N
*1
Heirloom, decorative hems 5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
3-19
Hemstitching
N
*1
Decorative hems and bridging
stitch
6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
3-20
Hemstitching
N
*1
Decorative hems. Fagoting,
attaching ribbon
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
3.0 (1/8)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
OK
( J )
Reinforce-
ment
3-21
Hemstitching
N
*1
Decorative hems, smocking 6.0 (15/64)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
3-22
Hemstitching
N
*1
Decorative hems, smocking 5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 7.0
(0 - 1/4)
1.6 (1/16)
0.4 - 5.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Reinforce-
ment
4-01
Narrow rounded
buttonhole stitch A
Buttonhole on light to medium
weight fabrics
5.0 (3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Automatic
reinforce-
ment
4-02
Tapered round
ended buttonhole
stitch
A
Reinforced waist tapered
buttonholes
5.0 (3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Automatic
reinforce-
ment
4-03
Round ended
buttonhole stitch A
Buttonholes with vertical bar tack
in heavyweight fabrics
5.0 (3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Automatic
reinforce-
ment
Stitch
Stitch
number
Stitch name
Presser
foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Reverse
button
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
Stitch Setting Chart
B-50
4-04
Narrow squared
buttonhole stitch A
Buttonholes for light to medium
weight fabrics
5.0 (3/16)
3.0 - 5.0
(1/8 - 3/16)
0.4 (1/64)
0.2 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Automatic
reinforce-
ment
4-05
Stretch
buttonhole stitch A
Buttonholes for stretch or woven
fabrics
6.0 (15/64)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
1.0 (1/16)
0.5 - 2.0
(1/32 - 1/16)
NO
Automatic
reinforce-
ment
4-06
Heirloom
buttonhole stitch A
Buttonholes for heirloom and
stretch fabrics
6.0 (15/64)
3.0 - 6.0
(1/8 - 15/64)
1.5 (1/16)
1.0 - 3.0
(1/16 - 1/8)
NO
Automatic
reinforce-
ment
4-07
Bound
buttonhole stitch A
The first step in making bound
buttonholes
5.0 (3/16)
0.0 - 6.0
(0 - 15/64)
2.0 (1/16)
0.2 - 4.0
(1/64 - 3/16)
NO
Automatic
reinforce-
ment
4-08
Keyhole
buttonhole stitch A
Buttonholes in heavyweight or
thick fabrics for larger flat buttons
7.0 (1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
0.5 (1/32)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Automatic
reinforce-
ment
4-09
Tapered keyhole
buttonhole stitch A
Buttonholes in medium to heavy
weight fabrics for larger flat
buttons
7.0 (1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
0.5 (1/32)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Automatic
reinforce-
ment
4-10
Keyhole
buttonhole stitch A
Buttonholes with vertical bar tack
for reinforcement in heavyweight
or thick fabrics
7.0 (1/4)
3.0 - 7.0
(1/8 - 1/4)
0.5 (1/32)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Automatic
reinforce-
ment
4-11
Darning stitch
A
Darning of medium weight fabric 7.0 (1/4)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 2.5
(1/64 - 3/32)
NO
Automatic
reinforce-
ment
4-12
Darning stitch
A
Darning of heavyweight fabric 7.0 (1/4)
2.5 - 7.0
(3/32 - 1/4)
2.0 (1/16)
0.4 - 2.5
(1/64 - 3/32)
NO
Automatic
reinforce-
ment
4-13
Bar tack stitch
A
Reinforcement at opening of
pocket, etc.
2.0 (1/16)
1.0 - 3.0
(1/16 - 1/8)
0.4 (1/64)
0.3 - 1.0
(1/64 - 1/16)
NO
Automatic
reinforce-
ment
4-14
Button sewing
stitch M
Attaching buttons 3.5 (1/8)
2.5 - 4.5
(3/32 - 3/16)
NO
Automatic
reinforce-
ment
4-15
Eyelet stitch
N
For making eyelets, holes on
belts, etc.
7.0 (1/4)
7.0 6.0 5.0
(1/4 15/64
3/16)
7.0 (1/4)
7.0 6.0 5.0
(1/4 15/64
3/16)
NO
Automatic
reinforce-
ment
5-01
Reverse (Straight
stitch) N
For attaching appliqué on tubular
pieces of fabric and mitering
corners
——NO
Reinforce-
ment
5-02
Sideways to left
(Straight stitch)
N
For attaching appliqué on tubular
pieces of fabric
——NO
Reinforce-
ment
5-03
Sideways to right
(Straight stitch)
N
For attaching appliqué on tubular
pieces of fabric
——NO
Reinforce-
ment
5-04
Forward (Straight
stitch) N
For attaching appliqué on tubular
pieces of fabric and mitering
corners
——NO
Reinforce-
ment
5-05
Sideways to left
(Zigzag stitch)
N
For attaching appliqué on tubular
pieces of fabric
——NO
Reinforce-
ment
5-06
Sideways to right
(Zigzag stitch)
N
For attaching appliqué on tubular
pieces of fabric
——NO
Reinforce-
ment
5-07
Forward (Zigzag
stitch) N
For attaching appliqué on tubular
pieces of fabric and mitering
corners
——NO
Reinforce-
ment
5-08
Reverse (Zigzag
stitch) N
For attaching appliqué on tubular
pieces of fabric and mitering
corners
——NO
Reinforce-
ment
Stitch
Stitch
number
Stitch name
Presser
foot
Applications
Stitch width
[mm (inch)]
Stitch length
[mm (inch)]
Twin
needle
Reverse
button
Auto.
Manual
Auto.
Manual
Embroidery Step by Step
Basic operations B-51
STARTING TO EMBROIDER
B
Follow the steps below to prepare the machine for embroidery.
Chapter 3
STARTING TO
EMBROIDER
Embroidery Step by Step
Step 3
Step 1, 2
Step 5
Step 6
Step 4
Step 7, 8
Step 9
Step # Aim Action Page
1 Presser foot attachment Attach embroidery foot “Q. B-52
2 Checking the needle Use needle 75/11 for embroidery. B-30
3 Embroidery unit attachment Attach the embroidery unit. B-54
4 Bobbin thread setup For the bobbin thread, wind embroidery bobbin thread and set it in place. B-20
5 Fabric preparation Attach a stabilizer material to the fabric, and hoop it in the embroidery frame. B-58
6 Embroidery frame attachment Attach the embroidery frame to the embroidery unit. B-62
7 Pattern selection Turn the main power to on, and select an embroidery pattern. B-64
8 Checking the layout Check and adjust the size and position of the embroidery. B-65
9 Embroidery thread setup Set up embroidery thread according to the pattern. B-66
Attaching the Embroidery Foot
B-52
a
Press (Needle position button) to raise the needle.
b
Press .
The screen changes, and all keys and operation
buttons are locked (except ).
c
Raise the presser foot lever.
d
Press the black button on the presser foot holder to
remove the presser foot.
1 Black button
2 Presser foot holder
e
Use the included screwdriver to loosen the presser foot
holder screw, and then remove the presser foot holder.
The presser foot holder screw can also be loosened
or tightened with the disc-shaped screwdriver.
1 Screwdriver
2 Presser foot holder
3 Presser foot holder screw
f
Hold the embroidery foot with your right hand, as
shown.
Hold the embroidery foot with your index finger
wrapped around the lever at the back of the foot.
1 Lever
2 Embroidery foot bar
g
While pressing in the lever with your finger fit the
embroidery foot bar over the needle clamp screw and
then fit the presser foot holder screw into the presser
foot mounting notch to attach the embroidery foot to
the presser foot bar.
1 Embroidery foot bar
2 Needle clamp screw
3 Mounting notch
h
Secure the embroidery foot with the presser foot
holder screw.
Set the embroidery foot perpendicular.
1 Presser foot holder screw
Attaching the Embroidery Foot
CAUTION
Be sure to use embroidery foot when doing
embroidery. Using another presser foot may
cause the needle to strike the presser foot,
causing the needle to bend or break and
possibly cause injury.
a
b
a
b
c
a
b
c
b
a
a
Attaching the Embroidery Foot
Basic operations B-53
STARTING TO EMBROIDER
B
i
Hold the embroidery foot in place with your right
hand, and then use the included screwdriver to
securely tighten the presser foot holder screw.
j
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
CAUTION
Use the included screwdriver to firmly tighten
the screw of the embroidery foot. If the screw
is loose, the needle may strike the presser foot
and possibly cause injury.
Attaching the Embroidery Unit
B-54
a
Turn off the machine.
b
Pull the flat bed attachment off to the left.
c
Slide the tab on the cover of the connection port in the
direction of the arrow to open the cover.
d
Insert the embroidery unit connector into the
connection port, and then lightly push in the
embroidery unit until it snaps into place.
1 Connection port
2 Embroidery unit connector
e
Turn on the machine.
A message appears in the screen.
Attaching the Embroidery Unit
CAUTION
Do not move the machine with the embroidery
unit in place. The embroidery unit may be
dropped and cause injury.
Keep your hands and other objects away from
the embroidery carriage and frame. Otherwise
injury may result.
Note
Do not touch the connector in the embroidery
unit connector slot. The connector could be
damaged, and it may cause malfunctions.
Do not lift up on the embroidery carriage, and do
not forcefully move it. It may cause malfunctions.
CAUTION
Before attaching the embroidery unit, be sure
to turn off the machine. Otherwise, injuries
may occur if one of the operation buttons is
accidentally pressed and the machine starts
sewing.
Note
Be sure to close the cover of the connection port
when the embroidery unit is not being used.
Note
Make sure that there is no gap between the
embroidery unit and the machine, otherwise the
embroidery pattern may not be sewn correctly.
Be sure to fully insert the connector into the
connection port.
Do not push on the carriage when attaching the
embroidery unit to the machine, otherwise
damage to the embroidery unit may result.
a
b
Attaching the Embroidery Unit
Basic operations B-55
STARTING TO EMBROIDER
B
f
Be sure that no objects or hands are near the
embroidery unit and press .
The carriage moves to its initial position.
1 Carriage
The screen for selecting the embroidery pattern type
is displayed.
For details on the embroidery patterns, refer to
“Selecting Embroidery Patterns” on page B-64.
Removing the embroidery unit
Make sure that the machine is completely stopped and
follow the instructions below.
a
Remove the embroidery frame.
For details on removing the embroidery frame, refer
to “Attaching the Embroidery Frame” on page B-62.
b
Press , and then press .
The embroidery carriage moves into a position
where it can be stored.
c
Turn off the machine.
CAUTION
Keep your hands and foreign objects away
from the embroidery carriage and frame when
the machine is embroidering. Otherwise,
injury may result.
Note
If the machine was not initialized correctly, the
initial screen may not appear. This is not a sign of
a malfunction. If this occurs, turn the machine
off, then on again.
Memo
Utility stitches cannot be selected when the
embroidery unit is attached.
a
CAUTION
Always turn off the machine before removing
the embroidery unit.
It may cause malfunctions if removed when
the machine is turned on.
Attaching the Embroidery Unit
B-56
d
Hold the release button on the bottom left of the
embroidery unit, and slowly pull the embroidery unit
to the left.
1 Release button
CAUTION
Do not carry the embroidery unit by holding
the release button compartment.
a
Embroidery Attractive Finishes
Basic operations B-57
STARTING TO EMBROIDER
B
There are many factors that go into beautiful embroidery.
Using the appropriate stabilizer (page B-58) and hooping
the fabric in the frame (page B-58) are two important
factors mentioned earlier. Another important point is the
appropriateness of the needle and thread being used. See
the explanation of threads below.
Thread
Bobbin case
Two types of bobbin cases are included with this
machine. When embroidering, use the appropriate bobbin
case depending on the bobbin thread that will be used.
See the explanation of bobbin case types below.
Standard bobbin case (recommended for sewing and for
embroidering with included 60 weight bobbin thread)
1 Standard bobbin case
(green marking on the screw)
The standard bobbin case originally installed in the
machine has a green marking on the tension adjustment
screw. We recommend using the included embroidery
bobbin thread with this bobbin case. Do not adjust the
tension screw on this bobbin case with the green marked
screw.
Alternate bobbin case (for prewound or other
embroidery bobbin threads)
2 Alternate bobbin case
(no color on the screw)
The alternate bobbin case with no color on the tension
adjustment screw is set with tighter tension for embroidery
with different weights of bobbin threads and a variety of
embroidery techniques. This bobbin case is identified with
a dark colored mark on the inside of the bobbin cavity.
The tension screw on this case can be adjusted if
necessary. For details on adjusting thread tension, refer to
“Adjusting thread tension” in the “Embroidering” section.
See “Cleaning the race” in the “Appendix” section
for how to remove the bobbin case.
Embroidery Attractive Finishes
Upper thread Use embroidery thread intended for use with
this machine.
Other embroidery threads may not yield
optimum results.
Bobbin thread Use embroidery bobbin thread intended for
use with this machine.
Note
Before embroidering, check that there is enough
thread in the bobbin. If you start to sew your
embroidery project without enough thread in the
bobbin, you will need to rewind the bobbin in the
middle of the embroidery pattern.
Memo
If you use threads other than those listed above,
the embroidery may not sew out correctly.
a
CAUTION
When embroidering on large garments
(especially jackets or other heavy fabrics), do
not let the fabric hang over the table.
Otherwise, the embroidery unit cannot move
freely and the embroidery frame may strike the
needle, causing the needle to bend or break
and possibly cause injury.
Place the fabric so that it does not hang off the
table or hold the fabric to keep it from
dragging.
Note
Do not leave objects in the range of motion of the
embroidery frame. The frame may strike the
object and cause a poor finish to the embroidery
pattern.
When embroidering on large garments
(especially jackets or other heavy fabrics), do not
let the fabric hang over the table. Otherwise, the
embroidery unit cannot move freely, and the
pattern may not turn out as planned.
Preparing the Fabric
B-58
Attaching iron-on stabilizers (backing) to the
fabric
For best results in your embroidery projects, always use
stabilizer material for embroidery. Follow the package
instructions for the stabilizer being used.
When using fabrics that cannot be ironed (such as terry cloth
or fabrics that have loops which expand when ironed) or in
places where ironing is difficult, position the stabilizer
material under the fabric without fusing it, then position the
fabric and stabilizer in the embroidery frame, or check with
your authorized Brother dealer for the correct stabilizer to use.
a
Use a piece of stabilizer which is larger than the
embroidery frame being used.
1 Size of the embroidery frame
2 Iron-on stabilizer (backing)
b
Iron the iron-on stabilizer material to the wrong side of
the fabric.
1 Fusible side of stabilizer
2 Fabric (wrong side)
Hooping the fabric in the embroidery frame
Types of embroidery frames
The types and numbers of supplied embroidery frames
will differ depending on the machine model.
Large
Embroidery field 18 cm × 13 cm (7 inches × 5 inches)
Use when embroidering patterns between 10 cm × 10 cm
(4 inches × 4 inches) and 18 cm × 13 cm (7 inches × 5
inches).
Medium (sold separately with some models)
Embroidery field 10 cm × 10 cm (4 inches × 4 inches)
Use when embroidering patterns under 10 cm × 10 cm
(4 inches × 4 inches).
Preparing the Fabric
CAUTION
Use fabrics with a thickness of less than 3 mm
(approx. 1/8 inch). Using fabrics thicker than 3
mm (approx. 1/8 inch) may cause the needle
to break.
In the case of thick terry cloth towels we
recommend that you place a piece of water
soluble stabilizer on the top surface of the
towel. This will help to reduce the nap of the
toweling and result in more attractive
embroidery.
CAUTION
Always use a stabilizer material for embroidery
when sewing stretch fabrics, lightweight
fabrics, fabrics with a coarse weave, or fabrics
which cause pattern shrinkage. Otherwise, the
needle may break and cause injury. Not using
a stabilizer material may result in a poor finish
to your project.
Memo
When embroidering on thin fabrics such as
organdy or lawn, or on napped fabrics such as
terry cloth or corduroy, use water soluble
stabilizer (sold separately) for best results. The
water soluble stabilizer material will dissolve
completely in water, giving the project a more
attractive finish.
Preparing the Fabric
Basic operations B-59
STARTING TO EMBROIDER
B
Small (sold separately with some models)
Embroidering field 2 cm × 6 cm (1 inch × 2 - 1/2 inches)
Use when embroidering small sized patterns, such as
name tags.
Extra large (multi-position)
(sold separately with some models)
By attaching the extra large (multi-position) embroidery
frame using any of the three positions (1, 2 and 3)
shown in the illustration, patterns with a maximum size of
13 cm (5 inches) × 30 cm (12 inches) can be embroidered
if divided into sections to be used in the available
positions of the hoop with each section the maximum of
18 cm (7 inches) × 13 cm (5 inches) in any section.
Machine’s embroidery field is 18 cm × 13 cm (7 inches ×
5 inches).
Use when embroidering connected or combined
characters or patterns or large patterns.
1 Top installation position
2 Middle installation position
3 Bottom installation position
4 Embroidery field (when installed at position 1)
5 Embroidery field (when installed at position 2)
6 Embroidery field (when installed at position 3)
Using the appropriate frame for the pattern
size
Select a frame that is slightly larger than the pattern size.
Available frame options are displayed on the screen.
: Shows whether or not the large/extra large (multi-
position) frame can be used.
: Shows whether or not the medium frame can be
used.
: Shows whether or not the small frame can be used.
1 White: Can be used
2 Gray: Cannot be used
Inserting the Fabric
a
Loosen the embroidery frame adjustment screw and
remove the inner and outer frames, placing the outer
frame on a flat surface.
Separate the inner and outer frame by removing inner
frame upward.
1 Inner frame
2 Outer frame
3 Adjustment screw
b
Place the fabric with the stabilizer material on top of
the outer frame.
Have the right side of the fabric facing up.
1 Right side
c
Press the inner frame in from the top of the fabric.
Line up on the inner frame and on outer frame.
d
Tighten the adjustment screw by hand just enough to
secure the fabric.
CAUTION
If you use a frame that is too small, the presser
foot may strike the frame during sewing and
cause injury or may damage your machine.
a
b
c
d
e
f
1 2
Note
If the fabric is not securely held in the embroidery
frame, the embroidery design will sew out poorly.
Insert the fabric on a level surface, and gently
stretch the fabric taut in the frame. Follow the
steps below to insert the fabric correctly.
a
b
c
a
Preparing the Fabric
B-60
e
Gently remove the fabric from the frame without
loosening the adjustment screw.
f
Press the inner frame in from the top of the fabric
again, lining up on the inner frame and on
outer frame.
1 Outer frame
2 Inner frame
3 Fabric (right side)
4 Stabilizer material
Press the inner frame into the outer frame.
g
Tighten the adjustment screw while removing any slack
in the fabric by hand. The goal is to have a drum-like
sound when the fabric is struck lightly.
Using the embroidery sheet
When you want to embroider the pattern in a particular
place, use the embroidery sheet with the frame.
a
With a chalk pencil, mark the area of the fabric you
want to embroider.
1 Embroidery pattern
2 Mark
b
Place the embroidery sheet on the inner frame.
1 Embroidery sheet
2 Inner frame
3 Embroidery sheet base lines
c
Line the mark on the fabric up with the base line on the
embroidery sheet.
d
Place the inner frame with the fabric on the outer
frame and adjust the fabric if needed to align marks on
fabric with the embroidery sheet.
For details, refer to page B-59.
Memo
This precautionary step will help reduce pattern
distortion while embroidering.
a
bc
d
Memo
You can use the included screwdriver when you
loosen or tighten the frame adjustment screw.
a
b
c
Preparing the Fabric
Basic operations B-61
STARTING TO EMBROIDER
B
e
Remove the embroidery sheet.
Embroidering small fabrics or fabric edges
Use an embroidery stabilizer to provide extra support. After
embroidering, remove the stabilizer carefully. Attach the
stabilizer as shown in the following examples. We
recommend using a stabilizer for embroidery.
Embroidering small fabrics
Use a temporary spray adhesive to adhere the small piece
of fabric to the larger piece in the frame.
If you do not wish to use a temporary spray adhesive,
attach the stabilizer with a basting stitch.
1 Fabric
2 Stabilizer
Embroidering edges or corners
Use a temporary spray adhesive to adhere the small piece
of fabric to the larger piece in the frame.
If you do not wish to use a temporary spray adhesive,
attach the stabilizer with a basting stitch.
1 Fabric
2 Stabilizer
Embroidering ribbons or tape
Secure with double-sided tape or a temporary spray
adhesive.
1 Ribbon or tape
2 Stabilizer
Attaching the Embroidery Frame
B-62
a
Raise the presser foot lever to raise the presser foot.
b
While lightly holding the lever on the frame holder to
the left, align the two pins on the embroidery frame
holder with the mounting brackets on the frame, and
then press the frame into the embroidery frame holder
until a click is heard.
Hold the lever lightly to the left.
1 Lever
Press the front mounting bracket onto the pin until it fits
into place.
1 Front mounting bracket
2 Front pin
Press the back mounting bracket onto the pin.
1 Back mounting bracket
2 Back pin
Attaching the Embroidery Frame
Note
Wind and insert the bobbin before attaching the
embroidery frame making sure to use the
recommended bobbin thread.
a
a
b
a
b
Note
Be sure to completely insert both pins. If only
one of the pins is inserted, the pattern may not
turn out correctly.
Make sure that the notch on the side of the
embroidery frame fits firmly under the bend in
the lever.
1 Notch on embroidery frame
2 Bend in lever
3 Carriage
4 Embroidery frame
Notch (1) fits firmly under the bend in the lever (2).
Notch (1) does not fit firmly under the bend in the
lever (2).
1 Notch on embroidery frame
2 Bend in lever
3 Carriage
4 Embroidery frame
CAUTION
Correctly set the embroidery frame into the
embroidery frame holder. Otherwise, the
presser foot may hit the embroidery frame,
resulting in injury.
a
b
c
d
a
b
c
d
b
a
b
c
d
Attaching the Embroidery Frame
Basic operations B-63
STARTING TO EMBROIDER
B
Removing the embroidery frame
a
Raise the presser foot lever to raise the presser foot.
b
While pushing the lever of the embroidery frame
holder to the left, slightly lift the back and then the
front of the embroidery frame up to clear the pins and
then remove.
Hold the lever lightly to the left.
1 Lever
Remove the back mounting bracket from the pin.
1 Back mounting bracket
2 Back pin
Remove the front mounting bracket from the pin.
1 Front mounting bracket
2 Front pin
CAUTION
Do not hit the needle with your finger or the
embroidery frame. It may cause injury or
needle breakage.
a
a
b
a
b
Selecting Embroidery Patterns
B-64
Copyright information
The patterns stored in the machine are intended for private
use only. Any public or commercial use of copyrighted
patterns is an infringement of copyright law and is strictly
prohibited.
Embroidery pattern types
There are many character and decorative embroidery patterns
stored in the machine's memory (see the “Embroidery Design
Guide” for a full summary of patterns in the machine's
memory). You can also use patterns from USB flash drive (sold
separately).
1 Embroidery patterns
2 Brother “Exclusives
3 Floral alphabet patterns
4 Character patterns
5 Frame patterns
6 Press this key to position the embroidery unit for storage
7 Patterns saved in the machine's memory
8 Patterns saved in USB flash drive
Selecting an embroidery pattern
Select a simple pattern built-in your machine and embroider
for testing purposes. You can try various selection of patterns
and pattern editing in the “Embroidering” section.
a
Press in the pattern type selection screen.
Once the machine has finished the initialization and
the carriage has moved to the start position, the
pattern type selection screen will display. If another
screen is displayed, press to display the screen
below.
b
Press or to display the desired pattern on the
screen. Press 4 times in this procedure.
c
Press , and then .
Pattern editing screen appears.
d
Press .
For details on pattern editing screen, refer to “Editing
Patterns” in the “Embroidering” section.
Embroidery settings screen appears.
e
Press .
For details on embroidery settings screen, refer to
“Editing Patterns” in the “Embroidering” section.
Confirm the pattern position to be sewn, referring to
“Confirming the Pattern Position” on page B-65.
Embroidering screen appears.
Selecting Embroidery Patterns
ab
c
f
e
hgd
Confirming the Pattern Position
Basic operations B-65
STARTING TO EMBROIDER
B
The pattern is normally positioned in the center of the
embroidery frame. If the pattern needs to be repositioned
for better placement on the garment, you can check the
layout before starting embroidery.
Checking the pattern position
The embroidery frame moves and shows the pattern position.
Watch the frame closely to make sure the pattern will be sewn
in the right place.
a
Press on the embroidery settings screen.
b
From , press the key for the position that you
want to check.
1 Selected position
The carriage will move to the selected position on
the pattern.
c
Press .
Previewing the selected pattern
a
Press .
An image of the pattern as it will be embroidered
appears.
b
Press to select the frame used in the
preview.
Frames displayed in light gray cannot be selected.
Press to enlarge the image of the pattern.
The pattern can be sewn as it appears in the
following display.
Frame sizes displayed on screen
c
Press to return to the original screen.
Confirming the Pattern Position
Memo
To see the entire embroidering area, press .
The embroidery frame moves and shows the
embroidery area.
CAUTION
Make sure the needle is up when the
embroidery frame is moving. If the needle is
down, it could break and result in injury.
1
Display Frame type and embroidering area
Large embroidery frame
18 cm × 13 cm (7 inches × 5 inches)
Medium embroidery frame (sold separately with
some models)
10 cm × 10 cm (4 inches × 4 inches)
Small embroidery frame (sold separately with some
models)
2 cm × 6 cm (1 inch × 2-1/2 inches)
Embroidering
B-66
After the preparations are done, you can try embroidering.
This section describes the steps for embroidering and
appliquéing.
Embroidering a pattern
Embroidery patterns are embroidered with a change of thread
after each color.
a
Prepare embroidery thread of the color shown on the
screen.
1 Embroidery color order
The thread color number set displayed for the thread
colors can be changed. Press , and then change
the setting in the settings screen. For details, refer to
“Changing the thread color display” on page B-67.
b
Set the embroidery thread, and thread the needle.
Refer to “Threading the upper thread” on page B-23
and “Threading the needle” on page B-25.
c
Pass the thread through the embroidery foot hole, and
hold it lightly in your left hand.
Give the thread a little slack.
d
Lower the presser foot, then press the “Start/Stop”
button to start embroidering.
After 5-6 stitches, press the “Start/Stop” button again
to stop the machine.
e
Trim the excess thread at the end of the seam. If the
end of the seam is under the presser foot, raise the
presser foot, then trim the excess thread.
If the thread is left at the beginning of the stitching, it
may be sewn over as you continue embroidering the
pattern, making it very difficult to deal with the
thread after the pattern is finished. Trim the thread at
the beginning.
f
Press the “Start/Stop” button to start embroidering.
Stitching stops automatically with reinforcement after
one color has been completed. When automatic
thread cutting is set, the thread is cut.
g
Remove the thread for the first color from the
machine. Thread the machine with the next color.
Embroidering
Note
Before using the needle threader, be sure to
lower the presser foot.
CAUTION
If the thread is pulled too tight, the needle may
break or bend.
Do not let hands or objects hit the carriage
while sewing. The pattern may misalign.
1
Embroidering
Basic operations B-67
STARTING TO EMBROIDER
B
h
Repeat the same steps for embroidering the remaining
colors.
When the last color is sewn, the message informing
that the embroidering is finished will appear on the
display. Press , and the display will return to the
initial screen.
i
Cut the excess thread jumps within the color.
Changing the thread color display
You can display the name of the thread colors or embroidery
thread number.
a
Press .
b
Use or on operation panel to display the thread
color selections.
c
Use or to select the name of the thread colors
or the embroidery thread number.
Thread color name
Thread number
d
When the thread number “#123” is displayed, use
or to select from six embroidery thread brands
pictured below.
* Depending on the country or area, cotton-like polyester
thread is sold.
e
Press .
Memo
For the automatic thread cutting setting, refer to
“Using the automatic thread cutting function
(END COLOR TRIM)” in the “Embroidering”
section.
Memo
Colors on the screen may vary slightly from actual
spool colors.
Embroidery (polyester thread)
Country (cotton thread)*
Madeira Poly (polyester thread)
Madeira Rayon
Sulky
Robison-Anton (polyester
thread)
Embroidering
B-68
Sewing
This section describes procedures for using the various utility stitches as well as other
functions. It provides details on basic sewing in addition to the more expressive features of
the machine, such as sewing tubular pieces and buttonholes.
Page number starts with “S” in this section.
Chapter1 SEWING ATTRACTIVE FINISHES......................... S-2
Chapter2 UTILITY STITCHES................................................... S-7
CAUTION
Before replacing the presser foot, be sure to press (Presser foot/Needle exchange key)
on the operation panel to lock all keys and buttons, otherwise injuries may occur if the
“Start/Stop” button or any other button is pressed and the machine starts. For details on
changing the presser foot, refer to “Replacing the Presser Foot” in the “Basic operations”
section.
Sewing Tips
S-2
Trial sewing
After you have set up the machine with the thread and needle
appropriate for the type of fabric being sewn, the machine
automatically sets the stitch length and width for the stitch
that is selected. However, a trial piece of fabric should be
sewn since, depending on the type of fabric and stitching
being sewn, the desired results may not be achieved.
For the trial sewing, use a piece of fabric and thread that are
the same as those used for your project, and check the thread
tension and stitch length and width. Since the results differ
depending on the type of stitching and the number of layers of
fabric sewn, perform the trial sewing under the same
conditions that will be used with your project.
Changing the sewing direction
a
When the stitching reaches a corner, stop the machine.
Leave the needle lowered (in the fabric). If the needle
remains up when the machine stops sewing, press
(Needle position button) to lower the needle.
b
Raise the presser foot lever, and then turn the fabric.
Turn the fabric using the needle as a pivot.
c
Lower the presser foot lever and continue sewing.
Sewing curves
Sew slowly while slightly changing the sewing direction to
sew around the curve. For details on sewing with an even
seam allowance, refer to “Sewing an even seam allowance”
on page S-3.
When sewing along a curve while using a zigzag stitch, select
a shorter stitch length in order to obtain a finer stitch.
Sewing cylindrical pieces
Removing the flat bed attachment allows for free-arm sewing,
making it easier to sew cylindrical pieces such as sleeve cuffs
and pant legs.
a
Pull the flat bed attachment off to the left.
b
Slide the part that you wish to sew onto the free arm,
and then sew from the top.
c
When you are finished with free arm sewing, install the
flat bed attachment back in its original position.
Chapter 1
SEWING ATTRACTIVE
FINISHES
Sewing Tips
Sewing Tips
Sewing S-3
SEWING ATTRACTIVE FINISHES
S
Sewing an even seam allowance
To sew an even seam, start sewing so that the seam allowance
is to the right of the presser foot, and the edge of the fabric is
aligned with either the right edge of the presser foot or a
marking on the needle plate.
Aligning the fabric with the presser foot
Sew while keeping the right edge of the presser foot a
fixed distance from the edge of the fabric.
1 Seam
2 Presser foot
Aligning the fabric with the stitch guide foot
(sold separately with some models)
Sew while keeping the right edge of the fabric aligned
with a desired position of markings on the stitch guide
foot.
1 Seam
2 Stitch guide foot
3 Markings
Aligning the fabric with a needle plate marking
The markings on the needle plate show the distance from
the needle position of a seam sewn with the straight stitch
(left needle position). Sew while keeping the edge of the
fabric aligned with a marking on the needle plate. The
distance between the markings in the upper scale is
1/8 inch (3 mm) and the distance between the markings in
the grid is 5 mm (3/16 inch).
For stitches with a left needle position
(Stitch width: 0.0 mm)
1 Seam
2 Presser foot
3 Centimeters
4 Inches
5 Needle plate
6 1.6 cm (5/8 inch)
1
2
1
2
3
Sewing Various Fabrics
S-4
Sewing thick fabrics
If the fabric does not fit under the presser foot
The presser foot lever can be raised to two different
positions. If the fabric does not fit under the presser foot,
for example, when sewing together thick fabrics, raise the
presser foot lever to its highest position so that the fabric
can be placed under the presser foot.
If the fabric does not feed
When sewing thick fabric such as denim or quilting, the
fabric may not feed at the start of sewing if the presser foot
is not level, as shown below. In this case, use the presser
foot locking pin (black button on the left side) of zigzag
foot “J” so that the presser foot remains level while sewing,
allowing the fabric to be fed smoothly.
If the presser foot misalignment is too large, place thick
paper or fabric (with the same thickness as the fabric being
sewn) under the heel of the presser foot to be able to start
sewing smoothly.
1 Sewing direction
2 Misalignment
3 Fabric being sewn
4 Fabric or thick paper
a
Raise the presser foot lever.
b
Align the beginning of stitching, and then position the
fabric.
c
While holding zigzag foot “J” level, push in and hold
the presser foot locking pin (black button on the left
side), and lower the presser foot lever.
1 Presser foot locking pin (black button)
d
Release the presser foot locking pin (black button).
The presser foot remains level, allowing the fabric to
be fed.
After the seam is sewn, the presser foot will return to
its original angle.
Sewing Various Fabrics
b
a
dc
Memo
You may find adjusting the “Presser Foot
Pressure” in the settings screen helpful on some
thick fabrics.
CAUTION
If fabric more than 6 mm (15/64 inch) thick is
sewn or if the fabric is pushed with too much
force, the needle may bend or break.
1
Sewing Various Fabrics
Sewing S-5
SEWING ATTRACTIVE FINISHES
S
Sewing thin fabrics
When sewing thin fabrics such as chiffon, the stitching may
become misaligned or the fabric may not feed correctly. Move
the needle (be sure to use a fine needle) to the furthest left or
right hand position so that the fabric does not get pulled down
into the feed dog area. If this occurs or there is shrinkage of
the stitching, place non-woven water-soluble stabilizer under
the fabric and sew them together. Using the straight stitch
needle plate* and straight stitch foot* is also effective when
sewing thin fabrics.
* Sold separately with some models.
1 Water-soluble stabilizer (non-woven)
Sewing stretch fabrics
First, baste the pieces of fabric together, and then sew without
stretching the fabric. If the stitching is misaligned, place non-
woven water-soluble stabilizer under the fabric and sew them
together.
1 Basting
For best results when sewing on knit fabrics use the stretch
stitches. Also be sure to use a needle for knits (Ball point
needle (gold colored)). The recommended stitches and their
stitch numbers are indicated below.
* Stitch patterns can be selected directly by pressing the
numeric keys on the machine during preset utility stitch
mode. Refer to “Basic operations” section.
Sewing leathers or vinyl fabrics
When sewing fabrics that may stick to the presser foot, such as
leather or vinyl fabrics, replace the presser foot with the
walking foot*, non stick foot* or roller foot*.
* Sold separately with some models.
1 Leather
If the leather or vinyl fabric sticks to the flat bed attachment,
sew with copy paper or tracing paper placed on top of the flat
bed attachment so the fabric moves smoothly.
If the paper is positioned so that it does not cover the needle
plate, the paper will not be sewn together with the fabric.
1 Copy paper or tracing paper
Stitch
Model 4 1-05 1-06 1-13 1-14 2-13
Model 3, 2
05
* 06*
13
14
*
48
Model 1
05
* 06*
11
12
*
42
1
1
Note
The walking foot can only be used with straight
or zigzag stitch patterns. Do not sew reverse
stitches with the walking foot.
When sewing with the walking foot, sew at a
speed between slow and medium.
When using the walking foot, test sew on a scrap
piece of leather or vinyl that is to be used in
project to make sure foot does not leave any
marks.
1
1
Sewing Various Fabrics
S-6
Sewing hook-and-loop fastener tape
Make sure that the needle passes through the hook-and-loop
fastener tape by turning the handwheel and lower the needle
into the hook-and-loop fastener tape before sewing. And then,
sew the edge of the hook-and-loop fastener tape at a slow
speed.
If the needle does not pass through the hook-and-loop
fastener tape, replace the needle with the needle size for
thicker fabrics. For details, refer to “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combinations” in the “Basic operations” section.
1 Edge of the hook-and-loop fastener tape
CAUTION
Use only the adhesive-free hook-and-loop
fastener tape which is designed for sewing.
When the glue adheres to the needle or the
bobbin hook race, it may cause malfunction.
If the hook-and-loop fastener tape is sewn with
the thin needle (65/9-75/11), the needle may
bend or break.
Note
Before sewing, baste together the fabric and the
hook-and-loop fastener tape.
Basic Stitching
Sewing S-7
UTILITY STITCHES
S
Straight stitches are used for sewing plain seams.
Using the table below, refer to “Using the utility
stitch tables in the “Sewing” section” in the “Basic
operations” section.
* Stitch patterns can be selected directly by pressing the
numeric keys on the machine during preset utility stitch
mode. Refer to “Basic operations” section.
Basting
When using Model 1: Sew basting with the preset stitch length
of 5mm (3/16inch).
When using Model 2 or 3: Sew basting with a stitch length
between 5 mm (3/16 inch) and 30 mm (1-3/16 inches).
a
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
b
Select stitch
.
c
Start sewing.
Basic stitching
a
Baste or pin together the fabric pieces.
b
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
c
Select a stitch.
d
Lower the needle into the fabric at the beginning of the
stitching.
e
Lower the presser foot lever, and then start sewing.
f
When sewing is finished, cut the thread.
Chapter 2
UTILITY STITCHES
Basic Stitching
Stitch name Stitch
Model 4
Presser foot
Model 3, 2
Model 1
Stitch number
Basting stitch 1-08 08 07
J
Straight stitch (Left)
1-01
01
* 01*
1-02
02
* 02*
Straight stitch (Middle) 1-03
03
* 03*
Straight stitch (Middle) 1-04
04* 04*
Triple stretch stitch 1-05
05
* 05*
J
Memo
If the basting threads fall out of the fabric, pull up
the bobbin thread before sewing, and then pull
the upper thread and bobbin thread under the
presser foot toward the back of the machine (refer
to “Pulling up the bobbin thread” in the “Basic
operations” section). Hold the upper thread and
bobbin thread when beginning to sew, and when
finished sewing, cut the threads leaving an excess
amount of thread.
Finally, hold the upper thread and bobbin thread
at the beginning of the stitching while arranging
the fabric.
J
Basic Stitching
S-8
Changing the needle position
The needle position used as the baseline is different for the
straight stitch (left needle position) and the straight stitch
(center needle position).
1 Straight stitch (left needle position)
2 Straight stitch (center needle position)
When the stitch width of the straight stitch (left needle
position) is set to its standard setting (0.0 mm), the
distance from the needle position to the right side of the
presser foot is 12 mm (1/2 inch). If the stitch width is
changed (between 0 and 7.0 mm (1/4 inch)), the needle
position will also change. By changing the stitch width
and sewing with the right side of the presser foot aligned
with the edge of the fabric, a seam allowance can be sewn
with a fixed width.
1 Stitch width setting
2 Distance from the needle position to the right side of the
presser foot
3 12.0 mm (1/2 inch)
4 10.0 mm (3/8 inch)
5 6.5 mm (1/4 inch)
6 5.0 mm (3/16 inch)
For details, refer to “Setting the stitch width” in the
“Basic operations” section.
12
0.0 2.0 5.5 7.0
34 5
6
1
2
Blind Hem Stitching
Sewing S-9
UTILITY STITCHES
S
Secure the bottoms of skirts and pants with a blind hem.
Using the table below, refer to “Using the utility
stitch tables in the “Sewing” section” in the “Basic
operations” section.
a
Turn the skirt or pants wrong side out.
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Right side of fabric
3 Edge of fabric
4 Bottom side
b
Fold the fabric along the desired edge of the hem, and
press.
c
Use a chalk to mark on the fabric about 5 mm (3/16
inch) from the edge of the fabric, and then baste it.
d
Fold back the fabric inside along the basting.
e
Unfold the edge of fabric, and position the fabric with
the wrong side facing up.
f
Attach blind stitch foot “R”.
g
Select or .
h
Remove the flat bed attachment to use the free arm.
Blind Hem Stitching
Stitch name Stitch
Model 4
Presser foot
Model 3, 2
Model 1
Stitch number
Blind hem stitch 2-01 36 31
R
Blind hem stretch
stitch
2-02 37 32
Memo
When the size of cylindrical pieces is too small to
slide onto the arm or the length is too short, the
fabric will not feed and desired results may not be
achieved.
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Right side of Fabric
3 Edge of fabric
4 Desired edge of hem
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
2
1
3
1
2
1
2
1
3
3
4
2
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Right side of fabric
3 Edge of fabric
4 Desired edge of hem
5 5 mm (3/16 inch)
6 Basting
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Right side of fabric
3 Edge of fabric
4 Desired edge of hem
5 5 mm (3/16 inch)
6 Basting
7 Basting point
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Right side of fabric
3 Edge of fabric
4 Desired edge of hem
5 Basting point
6 Basting
<Thick fabric>
<Normal fabric>
<Seen from the side>
1
2
1
2
3
5
6
4
1
2
1
3
6
5
1
1
2
7
4
5
1
1
1
1
1
2
6
3
4
Blind Hem Stitching
S-10
i
Slide the item that you wish to sew onto the free arm,
make sure that the fabric feeds correctly, and then start
sewing.
1 Free arm
j
Position the fabric with the edge of the folded hem
against the guide of the presser foot, and then lower
the presser foot lever.
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Fold of hem
3 Guide
k
Adjust the stitch width until the needle slightly catches
the fold of the hem.
1 Needle drop point
When you change the needle drop point, raise the
needle, and then change the stitch width.
1 Thick fabric
2 Normal fabric
If the needle catches too much of the hem fold
The needle is too far to the left.
Decrease the stitch width so that the needle slightly
catches the fold of the hem.
Example: Thick fabric
Example: Normal fabric
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Right side of fabric
Memo
Blind hem stitches cannot be sewn if the left
needle drop point does not catch the fold. If the
needle catches too much of the fold, the fabric
cannot be unfolded and the seam appearing on
the right side of the fabric will be very large,
leaving an unattractive finish. If you experience
either of these cases, perform the following
instructions to solve the problem.
1
2
Blind Hem Stitching
Sewing S-11
UTILITY STITCHES
S
If the needle does not catch the hem fold
The needle is too far to the right.
Increase the stitch width so that the needle slightly catches
the fold of the hem.
Example: Thick fabric
Example: Normal fabric
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Right side of fabric
l
Sew with the fold of the hem against the presser foot
guide.
m
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop sewing when you
are finished, and raise the presser foot and needle to
remove the fabric by pulling it back.
n
Remove the basting stitching and reverse the fabric.
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Right side of fabric
Note
Be sure to pull the fabric backward after finished
sewing. If you pull the fabric toward side or
forward, the presser foot may be damaged.
1
2
Overcasting Stitches
S-12
Sew overcasting stitches along the edges of cut fabric to
prevent them from fraying.
Sewing overcasting stitches using
overcasting foot “G”
Using the table below, refer to “Using the utility
stitch tables in the “Sewing” section” in the “Basic
operations” section.
* Stitch patterns can be selected directly by pressing the
numeric keys on the machine during preset utility stitch
mode. Refer to “Basic operations” section.
a
Attach overcasting foot “G”.
b
Select a stitch.
c
Position the fabric with the edge of the fabric against
the guide of the presser foot, and then lower the
presser foot lever.
1 Guide
d
Sew with the edge of the fabric against the presser foot
guide.
1 Needle drop point
e
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop sewing when you
are finished, and raise the presser foot and needle to
remove the fabric by pulling it back.
Overcasting Stitches
Stitch name Stitch
Model 4
Presser foot
Model 3, 2
Model 1
Stitch number
Overcasting stitch
1-15
15
* 13*
G1-16 16 14
1-17 17 15
G
a
CAUTION
After the stitch width is adjusted, rotate the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise).
Check that the needle does not touch the
presser foot. If the needle hits the presser foot,
the needle may break and cause injury.
1 The needle should not touch the center bar
If the presser foot is raised to its highest level,
the needle may strike the presser foot.
1
Overcasting Stitches
Sewing S-13
UTILITY STITCHES
S
Sewing overcasting stitches using zigzag foot
“J”
Using the table below, refer to “Using the utility
stitch tables in the “Sewing” section” in the “Basic
operations” section.
* Stitch patterns can be selected directly by pressing the
numeric keys on the machine during preset utility stitch
mode. Refer to “Basic operations” section.
a
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
b
Select a stitch.
c
Sew along the edge of the fabric with the needle
dropping off the edge at the right.
1 Needle drop point
1 Needle drop point
Sewing overcasting stitches using the side
cutter (sold separately with some models)
Using the side cutter, seam allowances can be finished
while the edge of the fabric is cut off. Five utility stitches
can be used to sew overcasting stitches with the side
cutter.
Using the table below, refer to “Using the utility
stitch tables in the “Sewing” section” in the “Basic
operations” section.
Side cutter
Stitch name Stitch
Model 4
Presser foot
Model 3, 2
Model 1
Stitch number
Zigzag stitch 1-09
09
* 08*
J
Zigzag stitch (Right) 1-11 11 10
2 steps elastic zigzag
stitch
1-13 13 11
3 steps elastic zigzag
stitch
1-14
14
* 12*
Overcasting stitch
1-18 18 16
1-19 19 17
1-20 20 18
1-21 21 19
Single diamond
overcast stitch
1-22 22
1-23 23
J
a
Note
Thread the needle manually when using the side
cutter, or only attach the side cutter after
threading the needle using the needle threader.
Stitch name Stitch
Model 4
Presser foot
Model 3, 2
Model 1
Stitch number
With side cutter
1-24 24 20
S
1-25 25 21
1-26 26 22
1-27 27 23
1-28 28 24
1
Overcasting Stitches
S-14
a
Remove the presser foot.
b
Hook the connecting fork of the side cutter onto the
needle clamp screw.
1 Connecting fork
2 Needle clamp screw
c
Position the side cutter so that side cutter pin is aligned
with the notch in the presser foot holder, and then
slowly lower the presser foot lever.
1 Notch in presser foot holder
2 Pin
d
Raise the presser foot lever to check that the side
cutter is securely attached.
e
Pass the upper thread under the side cutter, and then
pull it out toward the rear of the machine.
f
Select a stitch.
g
Make a cut of about 2 cm (3/4 inch) long in the fabric
at the beginning of the stitching.
1 2 cm (3/4 inch)
h
Position the fabric so that the right side of the cut is on
top of the guide plate and the left side of the cut is
underneath the presser foot.
1 Guide plate
If the fabric is not positioned correctly, the fabric will
not be cut.
If the fabric is not feeding properly, gently guide
fabric under foot the same as with regular sewing
feet.
i
Lower the presser foot lever, and then start sewing.
A seam allowance is cut while the stitching is sewn.
If the stitching is sewn in a straight line , the seam
allowance will be about 5 mm (3/16 inch).
1 5 mm (3/16 inch)
Note
When it is hard to set under the presser foot
holder, fit the pin on the side cutter into the notch
of the presser foot holder raising up the presser
foot lever higher.
b
a
b
a
Memo
The side cutter can cut as much as one layer of
13-oz. denim.
After using the side cutter, clean it by removing
any lint or dust.
If the side cutter can no longer cut fabric, use a
piece of cloth to apply a small amount of oil to the
cutting edge of the cutter.
1
a
1
Buttonhole Stitching/Button Sewing
Sewing S-15
UTILITY STITCHES
S
Using the table below, refer to “Using the utility
stitch tables in the “Sewing” section” in the “Basic
operations” section.
Buttonhole sewing
The maximum buttonhole length is about 28 mm (1-1/8
inches) (diameter + thickness of the button).
Buttonholes are sewn from the front of the presser foot to the
back, as shown below.
1 Reinforcement stitching
The names of parts of buttonhole foot “A”, which is used to
create buttonholes, are indicated below.
1 Button guide plate
2 Presser foot scale
3 Pin
4 Marks on buttonhole foot
5 5 mm (3/16 inch)
Buttonhole Stitching/Button Sewing
Stitch name Stitch
Model 4
Presser foot
Model 3, 2
Model 1
Stitch number
Narrow rounded
buttonhole stitch
4-01 77 57
A
Tapered round ended
buttonhole stitch
4-02 78 58
Round ended
buttonhole stitch
4-03 79 59
Narrow squared
buttonhole stitch
4-04 80 60
Stretch buttonhole
stitch
4-05 81 61
Heirloom buttonhole
stitch
4-06 82 62
Bound buttonhole
stitch
4-07 83 63
Keyhole buttonhole
stitch
4-08 84 64
Tapered keyhole
buttonhole stitch
4-09 85 65
Keyhole buttonhole
stitch
4-10 86 66
Button sewing stitch 4-14 90 70 M
5
2
1
3
4
A
Buttonhole Stitching/Button Sewing
S-16
a
Use chalk to mark on the fabric the position and length
of the buttonhole.
1 Marks on fabric
2 Buttonhole sewing
b
Pull out the button guide plate of buttonhole foot “A”,
and then insert the button that will be put through the
buttonhole.
If the button does not fit in the button guide
plate
Add together the diameter and thickness of the button,
and then set the button guide plate to the calculated
length. (The distance between the markings on the presser
foot scale is 5 mm (3/16 inch).)
1 Presser foot scale
2 Length of buttonhole (diameter + thickness of button)
3 5 mm (3/16 inch)
Example: For a button with a diameter of
15 mm (9/16 inch) and a thickness of 10 mm (3/8 inch),
the button guide plate should be set to 25 mm (1 inch) on
the scale.
1 10 mm (3/8 inch)
2 15 mm (9/16 inch)
The size of the buttonhole is set.
c
Attach buttonhole foot “A”.
Position the upper thread under the presser foot by
guiding thread through the hole in the presser foot
before attaching the buttonhole foot “A”.
d
Select a stitch.
e
Position the fabric with the front end of the buttonhole
mark aligned with the red marks on the sides of the
buttonhole foot, and then lower the presser foot lever.
1 Mark on fabric (front)
2 Red marks on buttonhole foot
3 Upper thread
When lowering the presser foot, do not push in the
front of the presser foot.
1 Do not reduce the gap.
1
2
3
2
1
2
1
Memo
If there is difficulty in aligning the marks, slowly
turn the handwheel toward you to check where
the needle will enter the fabric, and then align the
mark on the fabric with that point.
A
1
2
3
a
Buttonhole Stitching/Button Sewing
Sewing S-17
UTILITY STITCHES
S
f
Pull down the buttonhole lever as far as possible.
1 Buttonhole lever
The buttonhole lever is positioned behind the bracket
on the buttonhole foot.
1 Buttonhole lever
2 Bracket
g
Gently hold the end of the upper thread in your left
hand, and then start sewing.
Once sewing is completed, the machine
automatically sews reinforcement stitches, then
stops.
h
Press (Thread cutter button) once.
Raise the presser foot, and then remove the fabric.
i
Raise the buttonhole lever to its original position.
j
Insert a pin along the inside of one bar tack at the end
of the buttonhole stitching to prevent the stitching
from being cut.
1 Pin
k
Use the seam ripper to cut towards the pin and open
the buttonhole.
1 Seam ripper
For keyhole buttonholes, use the eyelet punch to make
a hole in the rounded end of the buttonhole, and then
use the seam ripper to cut open the buttonhole.
1 Eyelet punch
When using the eyelet punch, place thick paper or
some other protective sheet under the fabric before
punching the hole in the fabric.
Memo
If the automatic thread cutting setting was
selected before sewing, the machine will
automatically cut the threads at the end of the
stitching. For details, refer to “Automatically
cutting the thread” in the “Basic operations”
section.
When using the thread cutter on the left side of
the machine or scissors to cut the threads, press
(Needle position button) to raise the needle,
raise the presser foot, and then pull out the fabric
before cutting the threads.
a
2
1
CAUTION
When opening the buttonhole with the seam
ripper, do not place your hands in the cutting
direction, otherwise injuries may result if the
seam ripper slips.
Do not use the seam ripper in any other way
than how it is intended.
1
1
1
Buttonhole Stitching/Button Sewing
S-18
Changing the density of the stitching
Adjust the stitch length.
For details, refer to “Setting the stitch length” in the
“Basic operations” section.
If the fabric does not feed (for example, if it is too
thick), decrease the density of the stitching.
Changing the stitch width
Adjust the stitch width.
For details, refer to “Setting the stitch width” in the
“Basic operations” section.
Sewing buttonholes on stretch fabrics
When sewing buttonholes on stretch fabrics, use a gimp
thread.
a
Hook the gimp thread onto the part of buttonhole foot
“A” shown in the illustration.
b
It fits into the grooves, and then loosely tie it.
c
Attach buttonhole foot “A”.
d
Select stitch or .
e
Adjust the stitch width to the thickness of the gimp
thread.
f
Lower the presser foot lever and the buttonhole lever,
and then start sewing.
g
When sewing is finished, gently pull the gimp thread to
remove any slack.
h
Use a handsewing needle to pull the gimp thread to the
wrong side of the fabric, and then tie it.
Button sewing
Buttons can be sewn on with the machine. Buttons with two
or with four holes can be attached.
a
Measure the distance between the holes in the button
to be attached.
b
Raise the presser foot lever, and then slide the feed dog
position switch, located at the rear of the machine on
the base, to (to the left as seen from the rear of
the machine).
1 Feed dog position switch (as seen from the rear of the
machine)
c
Attach button fitting foot “M”.
d
Select stitch .
Since the end of the thread will be tied off later, do
not set the machine for programmed thread cutting.
e
Adjust the stitch width so that it is the same as the
distance between the holes in the button.
Memo
Before sewing buttonholes, check the stitch
length and width by sewing a trial buttonhole on a
scrap piece of fabric.
a
Buttonhole Stitching/Button Sewing
Sewing S-19
UTILITY STITCHES
S
f
Place the button in the position where it will be sewn,
and lower the presser foot lever.
1 Button
When attaching four-hole buttons, first sew the two
holes closest to you. Then, slide the button so that
the needle goes into the two holes toward the rear of
the machine, and then sew them in the same way.
g
Turn the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise) to
check that the needle correctly goes into the two holes
of the button.
If it seems as if the needle will hit the button, remeasure
the distance between the holes in the button. Adjust the
stitch width to the distance between the buttonholes.
h
Start sewing.
Set the sewing speed controller to the left (so that the
speed will be slow).
The machine automatically stops after sewing
reinforcement stitches.
Do not press (Thread cutter button).
i
Use scissors to cut the upper thread and the bobbin
thread at the beginning of the stitching.
Pull the upper thread at the end of the stitching to the
wrong side of the fabric, and then tie it with the bobbin
thread.
j
When you are finished attaching the button, slide the
feed dog position switch, to (to the right as seen
from the rear of the machine) and turn the handwheel
to raise the feed dogs.
Attaching a shank to a button
To sew the button with a shank, attach the button with
space between it and the fabric, and then wind the thread
by hand. This attaches the button securely.
a
Place the button into button fitting foot “M”, and then
pull the shank lever toward you.
1 Shank lever
b
After sewing is finished, cut the upper thread with
plenty of excess, wind it around the thread between
the button and the fabric, and then tie it to the upper
thread at the beginning of the stitching.
Tie together the ends of the bobbin thread at the end
and at the beginning of the stitching at the wrong side of
the fabric.
c
Cut off any excess thread.
CAUTION
When sewing, be sure that the needle does not
touch the button, otherwise the needle may
bend or break.
a
Memo
The feed dogs come up when you start sewing
again.
1
Zipper Insertion
S-20
Using the table below, refer to “Using the utility
stitch tables in the “Sewing” section” in the “Basic
operations” section.
* Stitch patterns can be selected directly by pressing the
numeric keys on the machine during preset utility stitch
mode. Refer to “Basic operations” section.
Inserting a centered zipper
Stitching is sewn on both pieces of fabric butted against each
other.
1 Right side of fabric
2 Stitching
3 End of zipper opening
a
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
b
Sew straight stitches up to the zipper opening.
With the right sides of the fabric facing each other, sew
reverse stitches after reaching the zipper opening.
c
Using a basting stitch, continue sewing to the edge of
the fabric.
1 Basting stitching
2 Reverse stitches
3 Wrong side of fabric
4 End of zipper opening
d
Press open the seam allowance from the wrong side of
the fabric.
1 Wrong side of fabric
e
Align the seam with the center of the zipper, and then
baste the zipper in place.
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Basting stitching
3 Zipper
f
Remove about 5 cm (2 inches) from the end of the
basting on the outside.
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Zipper basting
3 Outside basting
4 5 cm (2 inches)
g
Attach the presser foot holder to the right pin of zipper
foot “I”.
1 Pin on the right side
2 Needle drop point
Zipper Insertion
Stitch name Stitch
Model 4
Presser foot
Model 3, 2
Model 1
Stitch number
Straight stitch (Middle) 1-03
03
* 03*
J, I
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
1
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
2
1
I
Zipper Insertion
Sewing S-21
UTILITY STITCHES
S
h
Select stitch .
i
Topstitch around the zipper.
1 Stitching
2 Right side of fabric
3 Basting stitching
4 End of zipper opening
j
Remove the basting stitching.
Inserting a side zipper
Stitching is visible on only one piece of fabric. Use this type of
zipper application for side openings and back openings.
1 Stitching
2 Right side of fabric
3 End of zipper opening
The following procedure will describe how to stitch on the left
side, as shown in the illustration.
a
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
b
Sew straight stitches up to the zipper opening.
With the right sides of the fabric facing each other, sew
reverse stitches after reaching the zipper opening.
c
Using a basting stitch, continue sewing to the edge of
the fabric.
1 Basting stitching
2 Reverse stitches
3 Wrong side of fabric
4 End of zipper opening
d
Press open the seam allowance from the wrong side of
the fabric.
1 Wrong side of fabric
CAUTION
When using zipper foot “I”, be sure to select
the straight stitch (center needle position), and
slowly turn the handwheel toward
you
(
counterclockwise)
to check that the needle
does not touch the presser foot. If a different
stitch is selected or the needle hits the presser
foot, the needle may bend or break.
CAUTION
When sewing, be sure that the needle does not
touch the zipper, otherwise the needle may
bend or break.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
1
Zipper Insertion
S-22
e
Press the seam allowance so that the right side (the side
that will not be stitched) has an extra 3 mm (1/8 inch).
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 3 mm (1/8 inch)
f
Align the zipper teeth with the pressed edge of the
fabric having the extra 3 mm (1/8 inch), and then baste
or pin the zipper in place.
1 Zipper teeth
2 Basting stitching
g
Attach the presser foot holder to the right pin of zipper
foot “I”.
If the stitching will be sewn on the right side, attach the
presser foot holder to the left pin of the zipper foot.
1 Pin on the right side
2 Needle drop point
h
Select stitch .
i
Sew the zipper to the piece of fabric with the extra 3
mm (1/8 inch), starting from the base of the zipper.
j
When you are about 5 cm (2 inches) from the end of
the zipper, stop the machine with the needle lowered
(in the fabric), raise the presser foot lever.
k
Open the zipper and continue sewing.
l
Close the zipper, turn over the fabric, and then baste
the other side of the zipper to the fabric.
1 Basting stitching
m
Attach the presser foot holder to the other pin of
zipper foot “I”.
If the presser foot holder was attached to the right pin in
step
g, change it to the left pin.
1 Pin on the left side
2 Needle drop point
CAUTION
When using zipper foot “I”, be sure to select
the straight stitch (center needle position), and
slowly turn the handwheel toward you
(
counterclockwise)
to check that the needle
does not touch the presser foot. If a different
stitch is selected or the needle hits the presser
foot, the needle may bend or break.
1
2
2
1
2
1
I
CAUTION
When sewing, be sure that the needle does not
touch the zipper, otherwise the needle may
bend or break.
1
I
1
2
Zipper Insertion
Sewing S-23
UTILITY STITCHES
S
n
Topstitch around the zipper.
Sew reverse stitches at the end of the zipper opening
and align the zipper teeth with the side of the presser
foot.
1 Right side of fabric
2 End of zipper opening
3 Reverse stitches
4 Beginning of stitching
5 Basting stitching
o
When you are about 5 cm (2 inches) from the end of
the zipper, stop the machine with the needle lowered
(in the fabric), and then raise the presser foot lever.
p
Remove the basting stitching, open the zipper, and
then continue sewing.
CAUTION
When sewing, be sure that the needle does not
touch the zipper, otherwise the needle may
bend or break.
1
2
3
4
5
Zipper/piping Insertion
S-24
A zipper and piping can be sewn in place.
Using the table below, refer to “Using the utility
stitch tables in the “Sewing” section” in the “Basic
operations” section.
* Stitch patterns can be selected directly by pressing the
numeric keys on the machine during preset utility stitch
mode. Refer to “Basic operations” section.
**Adjustable zipper/piping foot (sold separately with some
models)
Inserting a centered zipper
a
Refer to step af of “Inserting a centered zipper”
on page S-20.
b
Remove the presser foot and presser foot holder to
attach the screw-on adjustable zipper/piping foot (sold
separately with some models).
For details on removing the presser foot holder, refer
to “Removing and attaching the presser foot holder”
in the “Basic operations” section.
c
Select stitch .
d
Loosen the positioning screw on the back of the presser
foot.
1 Positioning screw
e
Slide the presser foot over to either the left or right
feed dog.
f
Change the needle position so that the needle does not
touch the presser foot.
For details, refer to “Setting the stitch width” in the
“Basic operations” section.
1 Needle drop point
g
Securely tighten the positioning screw using a
screwdriver.
1 Positioning screw
Zipper/piping Insertion
Stitch name Stitch
Model 4
Presser foot
Model 3, 2
Model 1
Stitch number
Straight stitch (Left) 1-01
01
* 01***
Note
Make sure that the thread between the spool and
the bobbin is pulled tight.
1
CAUTION
After adjusting the needle position, slowly turn
the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise)
and check the needle does not touch the
presser foot. If the needle hits the presser foot,
the needle may bend or break.
Left sewing position
Right sewing position
1
1
Zipper/piping Insertion
Sewing S-25
UTILITY STITCHES
S
h
Topstitch around the zipper.
1 Stitching
2 Right side of fabric
3 Basting stitching
4 End of zipper opening
i
Remove the basting stitching.
Inserting a piping
a
Place the piping between two layers of fabric, right
sides together, as shown below.
1 Fabric
2 Piping
3 Fabric
b
Refer to the steps of attaching the adjustable zipper/
piping foot on page S-24.
c
Sew along the piping.
d
After sewing, turn them over.
CAUTION
When sewing, be sure that the needle does not
touch the zipper, otherwise the needle may
bend or break.
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
Sewing Stretch Fabrics and Elastic Tape
S-26
Using the table below, refer to “Using the utility
stitch tables in the “Sewing” section” in the “Basic
operations” section.
* Stitch patterns can be selected directly by pressing the
numeric keys on the machine during preset utility stitch
mode. Refer to “Basic operations” section.
Stretch stitching
a
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
b
Select stitch .
c
Sew the fabric without stretching it.
Elastic attaching
When elastic tape is attached to the cuff or waist of a piece of
clothing, the finished dimensions will be that of the stretched
elastic tape. Therefore, it is necessary that a suitable length of
the elastic tape be used.
a
Pin the elastic tape to the wrong side of the fabric.
Pin the elastic tape to the fabric at a few points to make
sure that the tape is uniformly positioned on the fabric.
1 Elastic tape
2 Pin
b
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
c
Select a stitch.
d
Sew the elastic tape to the fabric while stretching the
tape so that it is the same length as the fabric.
While pulling the fabric behind the presser foot with
your left hand, pull the fabric at the pin nearest the front
of the presser foot with your right hand.
Sewing Stretch Fabrics and Elastic Tape
Stitch name Stitch
Model 4
Presser foot
Model 3, 2
Model 1
Stitch number
Stem stitch 1-06
06
* 06*
J
2 steps elastic zigzag
stitch
1-13 13 11
3 steps elastic zigzag
stitch
1-14
14
* 12*
Tape attaching stitch 2-13 48 42
J
CAUTION
When sewing, be sure that the needle does not
touch any pins, otherwise the needle may bend
or break.
1
2
J
Appliqué, Patchwork and Quilt Stitching
Sewing S-27
UTILITY STITCHES
S
Using the table below, refer to “Using the utility
stitch tables in the “Sewing” section” in the “Basic
operations” section.
* Stitch patterns can be selected directly by pressing the
numeric keys on the machine during preset utility stitch
mode. Refer to “Basic operations” section.
Appliqué stitching
a
Cut out the appliqué, leaving a seam allowance
between 3 and 5 mm (1/8 and 3/16 inch).
1 Seam allowance
b
Place a pattern made of thick paper or stabilizer on the
back of the appliqué, and then fold over the seam
allowance using an iron.
c
Turn the fabric over, and then baste or fuse it onto the
fabric that it will be attached to.
1 Basting stitching
d
Attach the zigzag foot “J” or the open toe foot (sold
Separately with some models) shown below.
Appliqué, Patchwork and Quilt Stitching
Stitch name Stitch
Model 4
Presser foot
Model 3, 2
Model 1
Stitch number
Zigzag stitch 1-09
09
* 08*
J
Quilting appliqué
zigzag stitch
1-33 33 28
Blanket stitch 2-03 38 33
Quilting appliqué
stitch
1-34 34 29
Piecing stitch (Right) 1-29 29 25
Piecing stitch (Middle) 1-30 30 26
Piecing stitch (Left) 1-31 31
Patchwork join stitch 2-07 42 36
Patchwork double
overlock stitch
2-08 43 37
Couching stitch 2-09 44 38
Hand-look quilting
stitch
1-32 32 27
Quilting stippling
stitch
1-35 35 30
Memo
Patterns showing a “Q” in the table above are for
quilting and those showing a “P” are for piecing.
Note
If glue is used to hold the appliqué in place on
the fabric, do not apply glue to areas that will be
sewn with the machine. If glue adheres to the
needle or bobbin case, the machine may be
damaged.
Zigzag foot “J” Open toe foot
1
1
J
Appliqué, Patchwork and Quilt Stitching
S-28
e
Select a stitch.
f
Turn the handwheel toward you (counterclockwise),
and then begin sewing around the edge of the
appliqué, making sure that the needle drops just
outside of the appliqué.
When sewing around corners, stop the machine with
the needle in the fabric just outside of the appliqué,
raise the presser foot lever, and then turn the fabric as
needed to change the sewing direction.
Patchwork (crazy quilt) stitching
a
Fold the edge of the top piece of fabric and place it
over the lower piece.
b
Sew the two pieces of fabric together so the pattern
spans over both pieces.
Piecing
Sewing together two pieces of fabric is called “piecing”. The
fabric pieces should be cut with a 6.5 mm (1/4 inch) seam
allowance.
Sew a piecing straight stitch 6.5 mm (1/4 inch) from either the
right side or the left side of the presser foot.
a
Baste or pin along the seam allowance of the fabric
that you wish to piece together.
b
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
c
Select stitch or .
d
Sew with the side of the presser foot aligned with the
edge of the fabric.
For a seam allowance on the right side
Align the right side of the presser foot with the edge of the
fabric, and sew using stitch .
1 6.5 mm (1/4 inch)
For a seam allowance on the left side
Align the left side of the presser foot with the edge of the
fabric, and sew using stitch .
1 6.5 mm (1/4 inch)
Memo
To change the width of the seam allowance
(needle position), adjust the stitch width. For
details, refer to “Setting the stitch width” in the
“Basic operations” section.
J
1
1
Appliqué, Patchwork and Quilt Stitching
Sewing S-29
UTILITY STITCHES
S
Piecing using the 1/4" quilting foot with guide
(sold separately with some models)
This quilting foot can sew an accurate 1/4 inch or 1/8 inch
seam allowance.
It can be used for piecing together a quilt or for
topstitching.
a
Press , and then attach the 1/4” quilting foot with
guide.
b
Use the guide and marks on the presser foot to sew
accurate seam allowances.
Piecing a 1/4 inch seam allowance
Sew keeping the edge of the fabrics against the guide.
1 Guide
2 1/4 inch
Creating an accurate seam allowance
Use the mark on the foot to begin, end, or pivot 1/4 inch
from edge of fabric.
1 Align this mark with edge of fabric to begin.
2 Beginning of stitching
3 End of stitching
4 Opposite edge of fabric to end or pivot
5 1/4 inch
Topstitching quilting, 1/8 inch
Sew with the edge of the fabric aligned with the left side of
the presser foot end.
1 Surface of fabric
2 Seam
3 1/8 inch
Using the 1/4" quilting foot (sold separately
with some models)
If the 1/4" quilting foot is used, seams can be sewn with a
seam allowance of 6.4 mm (1/4 inch).
a
Baste or pin along the seam allowance of the fabric
that you wish to piece together.
b
Attach the 1/4" quilting foot.
c
Select stitch .
d
Align the mark at the upper edge of the 1/4" quilting
foot with the upper edge of the fabric.
Align the right edge of the fabric with the right edge of
the narrow part of the 1/4" quilting foot.
1 Mark on 1/4" quilting foot
2 Beginning of stitching
When sewing with a seam allowance, align the left edge
of the narrow part of the 1/4" quilting foot with the
fabric edge.
1 Seam (3.2 mm (1/8 inch))
a
b
a
e
e
c
d
b
a
b
c
1
2
1
Appliqué, Patchwork and Quilt Stitching
S-30
e
Start sewing.
f
When the end of the stitching is reached, stop the
machine.
Sew until the mark at the lower edge of the 1/4" quilting
foot aligns with the lower edge of the fabric.
1 6.4mm (1/4 inch)
2 End of stitching
3 Mark on 1/4" quilting foot
Quilting
Sandwiching batting between the top and bottom layers of
fabric is called “quilting”. Quilts can easily be sewn using the
walking foot* and the quilting guide*.
* Sold separately with some models.
a
Baste the fabric to be quilted.
b
Remove the presser foot and the presser foot holder.
For details, refer to “Removing and attaching the
presser foot holder” in the “Basic operations”
section.
c
Hook the connecting fork of the walking foot onto the
needle clamp screw.
1 Connecting fork
2 Needle clamp screw
d
Lower the presser foot lever, insert the presser foot
holder screw, and then tighten the screw with the
screwdriver.
1 Presser foot holder screw
e
Select a stitch.
f
Place one hand on each side of the presser foot, and
then evenly guide the fabric while sewing.
Note
Thread the needle manually when using the
walking foot, or attach the walking foot only after
threading the needle using the needle threader.
When quilting, use a 90/14 home sewing
machine needle.
The walking foot can only be used with straight
or zigzag stitch patterns. Do not sew reverse
stitches with the walking foot.
When sewing with the walking foot, sew at a
speed between slow and medium.
When using the walking foot, test sew on a scrap
piece of fabric that is to be used in project.
2
3
1
CAUTION
Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the
screwdriver, otherwise the needle may touch
the presser foot, causing it to bend or break.
Before starting to sew, slowly turn the
handwheel toward you (counterclockwise)
and
check that the needle does not touch the
presser foot. If the needle hits the presser foot,
the needle may bend or break.
a
b
a
Appliqué, Patchwork and Quilt Stitching
Sewing S-31
UTILITY STITCHES
S
Using the quilting guide (sold separately with
some models)
Use the quilting guide to sew parallel stitches that are
equally spaced.
a
Insert the stem of the quilting guide into the hole at the
rear of the walking foot or presser foot holder.
Walking foot
Presser foot holder
b
Adjust the stem of the quilting guide so that the guide
aligns with the seam that has already been sewn.
Free motion quilting
We recommend attaching the foot controller and sewing at a
consistent speed. You can adjust the sewing speed with the
speed control slide on the machine.
Using free motion open toe quilting foot “O”*
or quilting foot*
* Sold separately with some models.
The free motion open toe quilting foot “O” or quilting foot
is used for free motion quilting with zigzag or decorative
stitches or for free motion quilting of straight lines on
fabric with an uneven thickness. Various stitches can be
sewn using free motion open toe quilting foot “O”. For
details on the stitches that can be used, refer to “Stitch
Setting Chart” in the “Basic operations” section.
a
Slide the feed dog position switch, located at the rear
of the machine on the base, to (to the left as seen
from the rear of the machine).
1 Feed dog position switch (as seen from the rear of the
machine)
The feed dogs are lowered.
b
Select a stitch.
c
Remove the presser foot holder.
For details, refer to “Removing and attaching the
presser foot holder” in the “Basic operations”
section.
d
Attach the quilting foot by positioning the pin of the
quilting foot above the needle clamp screw and
aligning the lower-left of the quilting foot and the
presser bar.
1 Pin
2 Needle clamp screw
3 Presser bar
CAUTION
With free motion quilting, control the feeding
speed of the fabric to match the sewing speed.
If the fabric is moved faster than the sewing
speed, the needle may break or other damage
may result.
Free motion open
toe quilting foot “O”
Quilting foot
Note
Make sure that the quilting foot is not slanted.
a
a
b
c
a
b
c
Appliqué, Patchwork and Quilt Stitching
S-32
e
Hold the quilting foot in place with your right hand,
and tighten the presser foot holder screw using the
screwdriver with your left hand.
1 Presser foot holder screw
f
Use both hands to stretch the fabric taut, and then
move the fabric at a consistent pace in order to sew
uniform stitches roughly 2.0 mm - 2.5 mm (approx.
1/16 inch - 3/32 inch) in length.
1 Stitch
g
After sewing is finished, slide the feed dog position
switch lever to (to the right as seen from the rear
of the machine) and turn the handwheel to raise the
feed dogs.
Satin stitching using the sewing speed
controller
A decorative stitch can be sewn by changing the stitch width
of a satin stitch. If the machine is set so that the stitch width
can be adjusted using the sewing speed controller, the stitch
width can quickly and easily be adjusted. In this case, the
sewing speed is adjusted with the foot controller.
a
Connect the foot controller.
b
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
c
Press to display the settings screen, and set
“Width Control” to “ON”.
The settings screens differ depending on the models.
The machine is now set so that the stitch width can
be controlled with the sewing speed controller.
d
Press .
e
Select stitch .
f
While sewing, slide the sewing speed controller to
adjust the stitch width.
Slide the controller to the left to make the width
narrower. Slide the controller to the right to make the
width wider.
Adjust the sewing speed with the foot controller.
g
When you are finished sewing, set the stitch width
control setting back to “OFF”.
CAUTION
Be sure to securely tighten the screws with the
included screwdriver. Otherwise, the needle
may touch the quilting foot, causing it to bend
or break.
Memo
Do not be discouraged with your initial results.
The technique requires practice.
J
Narrower Wider
Memo
Although the stitching result differs depending on
the type of fabric being sewn and the thickness of
the thread being used, for best results, adjust the
stitch length to between 0.3 and 0.5 mm (1/64 and
1/32 inch).
Reinforcement Stitching
Sewing S-33
UTILITY STITCHES
S
Reinforce points that will be subject to strain, such as sleeve
holes, inseams and pocket corners.
Using the table below, refer to “Using the utility
stitch tables in the “Sewing” section” in the “Basic
operations” section.
* Stitch patterns can be selected directly by pressing the
numeric keys on the machine during preset utility stitch
mode. Refer to “Basic operations” section.
Triple stretch stitching
Use triple stretch stitching to reinforce sleeve holes and
inseams.
a
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
b
Select stitch
.
c
Start sewing.
Bar tack stitching
Bar tacks are used to reinforce points subject to strain, such as
pocket corners and openings.
As an example, the procedure for sewing bar tacks at pocket
corners is described below.
a
Determine the desired length of the bar tack.
Set the button guide plate on buttonhole foot “A” to the
desired length. (The distance between the markings on
the presser foot scale is 5 mm (3/16 inch).)
1 Presser foot scale
2 Length of bar tack
3 5 mm (3/16 inch)
A bar tack with a maximum length of about 28 mm
(1–1/8 inches) can be sewn.
b
Attach buttonhole foot “A”.
c
Select stitch
.
d
Position the fabric so that the opening of the pocket
faces toward you, and then lower the presser foot lever
so that the needle drops 2 mm (1/16 inch) in front of
the pocket opening.
1 2 mm (1/16 inch)
Pass the upper thread down through the hole in the
presser foot.
When lowering the presser foot, do not push in the
front of the presser foot, otherwise the bar tack will
not be sewn with the correct size.
1 Do not reduce the gap.
Reinforcement Stitching
Stitch name Stitch
Model 4
Presser foot
Model 3, 2
Model 1
Stitch number
Triple stretch stitch 1-05
05
* 05*
J
Bar tack stitch 4-13 89 69
A
Darning stitch
4-11 87 67
4-12 88 68
J
3
1
2
1
a
Reinforcement Stitching
S-34
e
Pull down the buttonhole lever as far as possible.
1 Buttonhole lever
The buttonhole lever is positioned behind the bracket
on the buttonhole foot.
1 Buttonhole lever
2 Bracket
f
Gently hold the end of the upper thread in your left
hand, and then start sewing.
g
Raise the presser foot lever, remove the fabric, and
then cut the threads.
h
Raise the buttonhole lever to its original position.
Darning
1 Reinforcement stitching
a
Determine the desired length of the darning.
Set the button guide plate on buttonhole foot “A” to the
desired length. (The distance between the markings on
the presser foot scale is 5 mm (3/16 inch).)
1 Presser foot scale
2 Length of darning
3 5 mm (3/16 inch)
4 7 mm (1/4 inch)
A bar tack with a maximum length of about 28 mm
(1-1/8 inches) can be sewn.
Once sewing is completed, the machine
automatically sews reinforcement stitches, then
stops.
b
Attach buttonhole foot “A”.
c
Select stitch or .
Memo
If the fabric does not feed, for example, because it
is too thick, increase the stitch length. For details,
refer to “Setting the stitch length” in the “Basic
operations” section.
a
2
1
1
2
4
3
Reinforcement Stitching
Sewing S-35
UTILITY STITCHES
S
d
Position the fabric so that the needle is 2 mm (1/16
inch) in front of the area to be darned.
1 Tear
2 2 mm (1/16 inch)
Pass the upper thread down through the hole in the
presser foot, and then lower the presser foot.
When lowering the presser foot, do not push in the
front of the presser foot, otherwise the darning will
not be sewn with the correct size.
1 Do not reduce the gap.
e
Pull down the buttonhole lever as far as possible.
1 Buttonhole lever
The buttonhole lever is positioned behind the bracket
on the buttonhole foot.
1 Buttonhole lever
2 Bracket
f
Gently hold the end of the upper thread in your left
hand, and then start sewing.
g
Raise the presser foot lever, remove the fabric, and
then cut the threads.
h
Raise the buttonhole lever to its original position.
2
1
a
a
2
1
Memo
If the fabric does not feed, for example, because it
is too thick, increase the stitch length. For details,
refer to “Setting the stitch length” in the “Basic
operations” section.
Eyelet Stitching
S-36
Eyelets, such as those on belts, can be sewn.
Using the table below, refer to “Using the utility
stitch tables in the “Sewing” section” in the “Basic
operations” section.
a
Attach monogramming foot “N”.
b
Select stitch
.
c
Adjust either the stitch width or the stitch length to
select the desired eyelet size.
1 7 mm (approx. 1/4 inch)
2 6 mm (approx. 15/64 inch)
3 5 mm (approx. 3/16 inch)
For details, refer to “Setting the stitch width” and
“Setting the stitch length” in the “Basic operations”
section.
d
Lower the needle into the fabric at the beginning of the
stitching, and then lower the presser foot lever.
e
Start sewing.
Once sewing is completed, the machine
automatically sews reinforcement stitches, then
stops.
f
Use the eyelet punch to cut a hole in the center of the
eyelet.
When using the eyelet punch, place thick paper or
some other protective sheet under the fabric before
punching the hole in the fabric.
Eyelet Stitching
Stitch name Stitch
Model 4
Presser foot
Model 3, 2
Model 1
Stitch number
Eyelet stitch 4-15 91 71 N
1
2
3
Memo
If thin thread is used, the stitching may be too
open. If this occurs, sew the eyelet twice before
removing the fabric, one on top of the other.
Attaching Patches or Emblems to Shirt Sleeves
Sewing S-37
UTILITY STITCHES
S
Use these stitch patterns to attach patches or emblems to
pant legs, shirt sleeves, etc.
Using the table below, refer to “Using the utility
stitch tables in the “Sewing” section” in the “Basic
operations” section.
Insert the tubular piece of fabric onto the free-arm, and then
sew in the order shown in the illustration.
a
Remove the flat bed attachment.
b
Attach monogramming foot “N”.
c
Select stitch .
d
Lower the needle into the fabric at the beginning of the
stitching, and then start sewing.
Lower the needle at the upper-right corner.
The fabric is fed toward the back of the machine, as
usual.
e
After you have sewn to the corner, stop the machine,
and then select stitch .
f
Start sewing.
The fabric is fed to the right.
g
After you have sewn to the corner, stop the machine,
and then select stitch .
h
Start sewing.
The fabric is fed forward.
i
After you have sewn to the corner, stop the machine,
and then select stitch .
j
Start sewing.
The fabric is fed to the left.
Attaching Patches or Emblems to Shirt Sleeves
Stitch name Stitch
Model 4
Presser foot
Model 3, 2
Model 1
Stitch number
Reverse
(Straight stitch)
5-01 92
N
Sideways to left
(Straight stitch)
5-02 93
Sideways to right
(Straight stitch)
5-03 94
Forward
(Straight stitch)
5-04 95
Sideways to left
(Zigzag stitch)
5-05 96
Sideways to right
(Zigzag stitch)
5-06 97
Forward
(Zigzag stitch)
5-07 98
Reverse
(Zigzag stitch)
5-08 99
13
4
2
Attaching Patches or Emblems to Shirt Sleeves
S-38
k
After you have sewn to the corner, stop the machine,
and then select stitch again.
l
After sewing 3 to 5 stitches at the beginning of the
stitching, stop the machine.
Memo
The feeding direction of the fabric differs
depending on the stitch that is selected. Be sure
to guide the fabric while machine is sewing.
Decorative Stitching
Sewing S-39
UTILITY STITCHES
S
The utility stitches contain the following decorative
stitches.
Using the table below, refer to “Using the utility
stitch tables in the “Sewing” section” in the “Basic
operations” section.
Fagoting
Stitching across an open seam is called “fagoting”. It is used
on blouses and children's clothing. This stitch is more
decorative when thicker thread is used.
a
Use an iron to fold the two pieces of fabric along their
seams.
b
Baste the two pieces of fabric, separated by about 4
mm (3/16 inch), onto thin paper or a sheet of water-
soluble stabilizer.
If you draw a line down the middle of the thin paper or
water-soluble stabilizer, sewing is easier.
1 Thin paper or water soluble stabilizer
2 Basting stitching
3 4 mm (3/16 inch)
c
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
d
Select stitch or .
e
Set the stitch width to 7.0 mm (1/4 inch).
f
Sew with the center of the presser foot aligned along
the center of the two pieces of fabric.
g
After sewing is finished, remove the paper.
Decorative Stitching
Stitch name Stitch
Model 4
Presser foot
Model 3, 2
Model 1
Stitch number
Patchwork join stitch 2-07 42 36
J
Patchwork double
overlock stitch
2-08 43 37
Couching stitch 2-09 44 38
Shell tuck edge stitch 2-04 39 34
Smocking stitch 2-10 45 39
Feather stitch 2-11 46 40
Fagoting cross stitch 2-12 47 41
Satin scallop stitch 2-05 40 35
N
Hemstitching
3-04 58 48
3-06 60 50
3-09 63
3-10 64 52
Honeycomb stitch 3-12 66
Hemstitching
3-18 72 56
3-20 74
3-21 75
3-22 76
Ladder stitch 2-14 49 43
J
Rick-rack stitch 2-15 50 44
Decorative stitch 2-16 51 45
Serpentine stitch 2-17 52 46 N
2
1
3
J
Decorative Stitching
S-40
Scallop stitching
The wave-shaped repeated pattern that looks like shells is
called “scalloping”. It is used on the collars of blouses and to
decorate the edges of projects.
a
Attach monogramming foot “N”.
b
Select stitch .
c
Stitch along the edge of the fabric, making sure not to
sew directly on the edge of the fabric.
For better results, apply spray starch onto the fabric
and press with a hot iron before it is sewn.
d
Trim along the stitches.
Be careful not to cut the stitches.
Smocking
The decorative stitch created by stitching or embroidering
over gathers is called “smocking”. It is used to decorate the
front of blouses or cuffs.
The smocking stitch adds texture and elasticity to fabric.
a
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
b
Select the straight stitch, and then adjust the stitch
length to 4.0 mm (3/16 inch) and loosen the thread
tension.
For details, refer to “Setting the stitch length” and
“Setting the thread tension” in the “Basic operations”
section.
For details, refer to “Pulling up the bobbin thread” in
the “Basic operations” section.
c
Sew parallel stitching at intervals of 1 cm (3/8 inch).
1 1 cm (3/8 inch)
Do not use reverse/reinforcement stitching or thread
cutting.
At the end of the stitching, the thread is pulled out
about 5 cm (2 inches).
d
Pull the bobbin threads to create gathers.
Smooth the gathers by ironing them.
e
Select stitch , or .
f
Stitch between the straight stitches.
g
Pull out the threads for the straight stitches.
J
1
Decorative Stitching
Sewing S-41
UTILITY STITCHES
S
Shell tuck stitching
The gathers that look like shells are called “shell tucks”. They
are used to decorate trims, the front of blouses or cuffs made
of thin fabrics.
a
Fold the fabric along the bias.
b
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
c
Select stitch , and then increase the thread tension.
d
Sew while making sure that the needle drops slightly
off the edge of the fabric.
1 Needle drop point
e
Unfold the fabric, and then iron the tucks down to one
side.
Joining
Decorative bridging stitches can be sewn over the seam
allowance of joined fabrics. This is used when making a crazy
quilt.
a
Attach zigzag foot “J”.
b
Sew together the right sides of the two pieces of fabric,
and then open up the seam allowances.
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 7 mm (1/4 inch) seam allowance
3 Straight stitch
c
Select stitch , or .
d
Turn the fabric over so that the right side faces up, and
then sew over the seam with the center of the presser
foot aligned with the seam.
1 Right side of fabric
J
1
J
1
1
2
3
a
Decorative Stitching
S-42
Heirloom stitching
When sewing with the wing needle, the needle holes are
enlarged, creating a lace-like decorative stitch. This is used to
decorate hems and tablecloths on thin or medium weight
fabrics in addition to plain weave fabrics.
a
Install the wing needle.
Use a 130/705H 100/16 wing needle.
For details on installing a needle, refer to “Replacing
the Needle” in the “Basic operations” section.
The needle threader cannot be used with the wing
needle, otherwise the machine may be damaged.
Manually pass the thread through the eye of the
needle from the front to the back.
For details, refer to “Threading the needle manually
(without using the needle threader)” in the “Basic
operations” section.
b
Attach monogramming foot “N”.
c
Select a stitch.
The stitches that can be used are , , , , , , ,
or .
When sewing with the wing needle, select a stitch
width of 6.0 mm (15/64 inch) or less.
d
Start sewing.
Partially removing threads is called “drawnwork”. This gives
beautiful results with fabrics that have a loose weave.
Two ways to create drawnwork are described below.
Drawnwork (Example 1)
a
Pull out several threads from the fabric.
b
Attach monogramming foot “N”.
c
Select stitch .
d
With the right side of the fabric facing up, sew along
the right edge of the frayed section.
e
Turn on mirrored stitching.
For details, refer to “Mirroring stitches” in the “Basic
operations” section.
The pattern displayed on the screen is mirrored.
f
Sew along the other edge of the frayed section so that
it looks like the previous stitching.
g
Turn off mirrored stitching.
CAUTION
When sewing with the wing needle, select a
stitch width of 6.0 mm (15/64 inch) or less,
otherwise the needle may bend or break.
After adjusting the stitch width, slowly turn
the handwheel toward you (
counterclockwise)
and check that the needle does not touch the
presser foot. If the needle hits the presser foot,
the needle may bend or break.
N
N
Decorative Stitching
Sewing S-43
UTILITY STITCHES
S
Drawnwork (Example 2)
a
Pull out several threads from two sections of the fabric,
separated by an unfrayed section of about 4 mm (3/16
inch).
1 4 mm (3/16 inch)
b
Attach monogramming foot “N”.
c
Select stitch .
d
Sew along the center of the unfrayed section.
1
N
Decorative Stitching
S-44
Decorative
sewing
This section provides instructions on sewing character stitches and decorative stitches as well as on
adjusting and editing them. In addition, it describes how to use MY CUSTOM STITCH, which allows you to
create original stitch patterns.
Page number starts with “D” in this section.
Chapter1 CHARACTER / DECORATIVE STITCHES ...........D-2
Chapter2 MY CUSTOM STITCH .............................................D-18
CAUTION
Before replacing the presser foot, be sure to press (Presser foot/Needle exchange key)
on the operation panel to lock all keys and buttons, otherwise injuries may occur if the
“Start/Stop” button or any other button is pressed and the machine starts. For details on
changing the presser foot, refer to “Replacing the Presser Foot” in the “Basic operations”
section.
Selecting Stitch Patterns
D-2
Selecting decorative stitch patterns/satin
stitch patterns/7 mm satin stitch
patterns/cross stitch/utility decorative stitch
patterns
a
Select the category of the pattern you want to sew.
b
Press the key of the stitch pattern you want to sew.
Use or to display the previous/next page.
To select a different stitch pattern, press . When
the current stitch pattern is erased, select the new
stitch pattern.
Characters
Example: Entering “Blue Sky”.
a
Press .
b
Press , , , or to select a font.
Press a tab to change the selection screens.
Chapter 1
CHARACTER /
DECORATIVE STITCHES
Selecting Stitch Patterns
1 Decorative stitches
2 Satin stitches
3 7 mm satin stitches
4 Cross stitch stitches
5 Utility decorative stitch patterns
6 Characters (Gothic font, Handwriting font, Outline,
Cyrillic font, Japanese font)
7 Press this key to create your own stitches with the MY
CUSTOM STITCH function (page D-18)
8 Patterns stored in MY CUSTOM STITCH (page D-23)
9 Patterns saved in the machine’s memory (page D-16)
0 Patterns saved in USB flash drive (page D-16)
1 2 3 4
5
6 7 8 9 0
Selecting Stitch Patterns
Decorative sewing D-3
CHARACTER / DECORATIVE STITCHES
D
c
Press and then enter “B”.
d
Press / to display “l”, “u” and “e”, and enter
them.
e
Press two times and press to enter a space.
f
Press two times and enter “S”.
1 Space is a jump stitch
Remove the jump stitches after sewing.
g
Press to display “k” and “y”, and enter them.
If you want to continue entering characters in a
different font, press , and then repeat from step
a.
Deleting characters
a
Press to delete the last character entered.
b
Select the correct character.
Continually press and all characters will be
deleted.
Adjusting the character spacing
The space between the characters can be adjusted.
a
Press , and then press .
The character spacing window appears.
b
Press or to adjust character spacing.
Example: Each setting equals a specific distance between
characters.
Memo
Characters are deleted individually starting with
the last character entered.
1
Value: 0
Value: 10
Value mm
00
10.18
20.36
30.54
40.72
50.9
61.08
71.26
81.44
91.62
10 1.8
Memo
The default setting is “0”. No number less than “0”
can be set.
Changing character spacing by this method,
pertains to all characters. Spacing changes are
valid not only while entering characters but also
before and after the entering of characters.
Sewing Stitch Patterns
D-4
Sewing attractive finishes
To achieve attractive results when sewing
character/decorative stitches, check the table below for the
proper fabric/thread/needle combinations.
Basic sewing
a
Select a decorative/character stitch pattern.
b
Attach monogramming foot “N”.
c
Place the fabric under the presser foot, pull the upper
thread out to the side, press (Needle position
button) to lower needle into fabric and then lower the
presser foot.
d
Press the “Start/Stop” button to begin sewing.
e
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop sewing.
Sewing Stitch Patterns
Note
Other factors, such as fabric thickness, stabilizer
material, etc., also have an effect on the stitch,
so you should always sew a few trial stitches
before beginning your project.
It may be necessary to adjust the pattern,
depending on the type of fabric being sewn or
the sewing speed. Adjust the pattern while
sewing trial stitches on a scrap piece of fabric
that is the same as what is used in your project.
Refer to “Making adjustments” on page D-5.
When sewing satin stitch patterns, there may be
shrinking or bunching of stitches, so be sure to
attach a stabilizer material.
Guide the fabric with your hand to keep the
fabric feeding straight and even during sewing.
Fabric When sewing on stretch fabrics, lightweight
fabrics, or fabrics with coarse weaves, attach
stabilizer on the wrong side of the fabric. An
alternative would be to, place the fabric on thin
paper such as tracing paper.
1 Fabric
2 Stabilizer
3 Thin paper
Thread #50 - #60
Needle With lightweight, regular, or stretch fabrics: the Ball
point needle (golden colored) 90/14
With heavyweight fabrics: home sewing machine
needle 90/14
Presser foot Monogramming foot “N”.
Using zigzag foot “J” or other presser feet may
give inferior results.
Twin needle You can sew with twin needle (2/11) when you
select a 7 mm satin stitch pattern. In this case, use
zigzag foot “J”.
CAUTION
When sewing 7 mm satin stitch patterns and
the stitches are bunched, lengthen the stitch
length. If you continue sewing when the
stitches are bunched, the needle may bend or
break. For details on adjusting the stitch
length, refer to “Setting the stitch length” in
the “Basic operations” section.
Memo
If the fabric is pulled or pushed during sewing, the
pattern may not turn out correctly. Also,
depending on the pattern, there may be
movement to the left and right as well as front and
back. Guide the fabric with your hand to keep the
fabric feeding straight and even during sewing.
Sewing Stitch Patterns
Decorative sewing D-5
CHARACTER / DECORATIVE STITCHES
D
f
Press (Reverse stitch button) or (Reinforcement
stitch button) to sew reinforcement stitches.
Making adjustments
Your stitch pattern may sometimes turn out poorly, depending
on the type or thickness of fabric, the stabilizer material used,
sewing speed, etc. If your sewing does not turn out well, sew
trial stitches using the same conditions as the real sewing, and
adjust the stitch pattern as explained below. If the pattern
does not turn out well even after making adjustments based
on the pattern described below, make adjustments for each
pattern individually.
a
Press and select the following pattern on 6/7.
b
Attach monogramming foot “N” and sew the pattern.
c
Compare the finished pattern to the illustration of the
correct pattern below.
Memo
When sewing character stitches, the machine
automatically sews reinforcement stitches at the
beginning and end of each character.
When sewing is completed, trim any excess
thread between letters.
Note
When sewing some patterns, the needle will
temporarily pause in the raised position while the
fabric is fed due to the operation of the needle
bar separation mechanism which is used in this
machine. At such times, a clicking sound
different from the sound generated during
sewing will be heard. This sound is normal and is
not the sign of a malfunction.
Note
Be sure to use monogramming foot “N”.
Adjustments may not be made correctly with any
other presser foot.
Sewing Stitch Patterns
D-6
d
Press , and then adjust the pattern with the “Fine
Adjust Verti.” or “Fine Adjust Horiz.” displays.
If the pattern is bunched:
Press in the “Fine Adjust Verti.” display.
The displayed value increases each time the button is
pressed and the pattern will lengthen.
If the pattern has gaps:
Press in the “Fine Adjust Verti.” display.
The displayed value decreases each time the button
is pressed and the pattern will shorten.
If the pattern is skewed to the left:
Press in the “Fine Adjust Horiz.” display.
The displayed value increases each time the button is
pressed and the pattern will slide to the right.
If the pattern is skewed to the right:
Press in the “Fine Adjust Horiz.” display.
The displayed value decreases each time the button
is pressed and the pattern will slide to the left.
e
Sew the stitch pattern again.
If the stitch pattern still comes out poorly, make
adjustments again. Adjust until the stitch pattern
comes out correctly.
f
Press to return to the original screen.
Editing Stitch Patterns
Decorative sewing D-7
CHARACTER / DECORATIVE STITCHES
D
You can create just the finish you want using the editing functions. Make patterns larger or smaller, make mirror images,
etc.
Editing Stitch Patterns
Note
Some editing functions cannot be used with certain stitch patterns. Only the functions for the displayed keys are
available when a pattern is selected.
Character/decorative stitch screen Character/decorative stitch editing screen
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
1 Pattern display size Show the approximate size of the pattern selected.
100%: Nearly the same size as the sewn pattern
50%: 1/2 the size of the sewn pattern
25%: 1/4 the size of the sewn pattern
The actual size of the sewn pattern may differ depending on the type of fabric and
thread that is used.
2 Automatic
reverse/reinforcement key
Press this key to use the automatic reverse/reinforcement stitching function. For
details, refer to “Automatic reinforcement stitching” in the “Basic operations” section.
3 Automatic thread cutting
key
Press this key to set the automatic thread cutting function. For details, refer to
Automatically cutting the thread” in the “Basic operations” section.
4 Memory key Use this key to save stitch pattern combinations. D-14,
D-15
5 Image key Press this key to display an enlarged image of the selected stitch pattern. D-10
6 Edit/stitch switching key Press this key to switch to the editing screen for the character/decorative stitch
screen.
D-7
7 Horizontal mirror image key After selecting the stitch pattern, use this key to create a horizontal mirror image of
the stitch pattern.
D-8
8 Back to beginning key When sewing is stopped, press this key to return to the beginning of the pattern. D-9
9 Single/Repeat sewing key Press this key to choose single stitches or continuous stitches. D-9
0 Size selection key Use this key to select the size of the stitch pattern (large, small). D-8
A Some of the following keys will appear, depending on the selected stitch pattern.
Elongation key When 7mm satin stitch patterns are selected, press this key to choose from 5
automatic length settings, without changing the stitch zigzag width or stitch length
settings.
D-8
Thread density key After selecting the stitch pattern, use this key to change the thread density of the
pattern.
D-9
Character spacing key Press this key to change the spacing of character patterns. D-3
1
2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 0 D
A
C
B
Editing Stitch Patterns
D-8
Changing the size
After selecting desired stitch, press and then press to
change the size of the stitch pattern. The stitch pattern will be
sewn in the size highlighted on the key.
Example: Actual stitch pattern size
The size differs depending on the fabric and threads.
Large size
Small size
Changing the length (for 7 mm satin stitch
patterns only)
When 7mm satin stitch patterns are selected, press on the
editing screen to choose from 5 automatic length settings,
without changing the stitch zigzag width or stitch length
settings.
Creating a horizontal mirror image
To create a horizontal mirror image, select a stitch pattern
then press on the editing screen.
The stitch pattern is inverted.
B
Step stitch keys Use these keys to make step stitch patterns. D-13
C Delete key When you make a mistake selecting a stitch pattern, use this key to delete the
mistake. When you make a mistake in combining stitch patterns, use this key to
delete stitch patterns.
D-2,
D-3
D Manual adjustment key Press this key to change the stitch length, stitch width, “L/R Shift” or thread tension.
For details, refer to “Setting the Stitch” in the “Basic operations” section.
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
Memo
If you continue entering stitch patterns after
changing the size, those patterns will also be
sewn in that size.
You cannot change the size of combined stitch
patterns once the stitch pattern is entered.
Editing Stitch Patterns
Decorative sewing D-9
CHARACTER / DECORATIVE STITCHES
D
Sewing a pattern continuously
Press on the editing screen to select continuous sewing or
single stitch sewing.
The stitch pattern turns continuous.
Changing thread density (for satin stitch
patterns only)
After selecting a satin stitch pattern, press on the editing
screen to select your preferred thread density.
Returning to the beginning of the pattern
You can return to the beginning of the pattern after trial
sewing or when the stitching is sewn incorrectly.
a
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop the machine, and
then press on the editing screen.
Sewing returns to the beginning of the selected
pattern (“W”) from the point where sewing was
stopped.
b
Press the “Start/Stop” button to continue sewing.
Memo
To finish a complete motif while sewing the
pattern continuously, you can press the key
while sewing. The machine will automatically stop
when the motif is finished.
Low density ( ) High density ( )
CAUTION
If the stitches bunch when thread density is
changed to , return the thread density to
. If you continue sewing when the stitches
are bunched, the needle may bend or break.
Memo
Even if you select a new pattern after changing
the thread density, the thread density remains the
same until you change it.
You cannot change thread density for a combined
pattern after additional patterns are added.
Memo
If this key is pressed when sewing is stopped,
patterns can be added at the end of a combined
stitch pattern. (In this example, “!” is added.)
Editing Stitch Patterns
D-10
Checking the image
You can display an approximate size image of the selected
stitch pattern. You can also check and change the colors of
the image on the screen.
a
Press .
An image of the selected pattern is displayed.
b
Press to change the thread color in the image to
red, blue, or black.
The color changes every time you press the button.
c
Press to display the enlarged image.
d
Use / / / to view any part of the image that
extends out of the viewable display area.
e
Press to return to the original screen.
Memo
You can also sew from this screen when the
presser foot symbol is displayed.
Image of some patterns will display in default size
only.
Combining Stitch Patterns
Decorative sewing D-11
CHARACTER / DECORATIVE STITCHES
D
You can combine many varieties of stitch patterns, such as
character stitches, cross stitches, satin stitches, or stitches
you design with MY CUSTOM STITCH function
(page D-18 for information about MY CUSTOM STITCH).
You can also combine stitch patterns of different sizes,
mirror image stitch patterns and others.
Before combining
Single stitch sewing is automatically selected for sewing
combined patterns. If you want to sew the pattern
continuously, press to change after selecting the
stitch pattern combination.
When changing sizes, creating mirror images, or making other
adjustments to a combined stitch pattern, be sure to edit the
selected stitch pattern before selecting the next one. You
cannot edit a stitch pattern once the next stitch pattern is
selected.
Combining various stitch patterns
Example:
a
Press .
b
Select the following pattern on 4/7.
c
Press .
The display returns to the stitch selection screen.
d
Press .
e
Select the following pattern on 1/2.
f
Press to display editing screen, and then press .
The entered pattern is repeated.
Combining large and small stitch patterns
a
Press a desired pattern.
The large size stitch will be selected.
b
Press to display editing screen, and then press .
The stitch turns to a single pattern.
c
Press to display the previous screen, and select the
same pattern again.
Combining Stitch Patterns
Memo
Patterns are deleted individually starting with the
last pattern entered by pressing .
Combining Stitch Patterns
D-12
d
Press to display editing screen again, and then
press .
The pattern is displayed in a smaller size.
e
Press .
The entered pattern is repeated.
Combining horizontal mirror image stitch
patterns
a
Press a desired pattern.
b
Press to display editing screen, and then press .
The stitch turns to a single pattern.
c
Press to display the previous screen, and select the
same pattern again.
d
Press to display editing screen again, and then
press .
The pattern is flipped along a vertical axis.
e
Press .
The entered pattern is repeated.
Combining stitch patterns of different length
Example:
a
Press .
b
Press the following pattern on 2/3.
c
Press to display editing screen, and then press .
The stitch turns to a single pattern.
d
Press once.
The length of the image is set to .
Note
Some stitch patterns cannot be flipped. If a stitch
pattern that cannot be flipped is selected, in
the editing screen appears in light gray and is not
available.
Combining Stitch Patterns
Decorative sewing D-13
CHARACTER / DECORATIVE STITCHES
D
e
Press to display the previous screen, and select the
same pattern again.
f
Press to display editing screen again, and then
three times.
The length of the image is set to .
g
Press .
The entered pattern is repeated.
Making step stitch patterns
You can use the keys to create a step effect.
Stitch patterns sewn so that they create a step effect are called
step stitch patterns.
Press these keys to shift the stitch pattern to the left or right by
half width of the pattern.
Example:
a
Press .
b
Press the following pattern on 2/3.
c
Press to display editing screen, and then press .
The next stitch pattern will move to the right.
d
Press to display the previous screen, and select the
same pattern again.
e
Press to display editing screen again, and then
press .
The next stitch pattern will move to the left.
f
Press .
The entered pattern is repeated.
More Examples
Using The Memory Function
D-14
Stitch data precautions
Observe the following precautions when using stitch data
other than what was created and saved in this machine.
Types of stitch data that can be used
In the Character/Decorative Stitch memory, “.pmv”,
“.pmx” and “.pmu” stitch data files can be used with this
machine. “.pmu” or “.pmx” stitch data files can be
retrieved; however, when the machine is used to save the
file, it is saved as a “.pmv” stitch data file. Using data other
than what was created using this machine or the machine
which create “.pmv”, “.pmx” or “.pmu” data file, may
cause the machine to malfunction.
Types of USB media that can be used
Stitch data can be saved to or recalled from a USB flash
drive of any size.
Precautions when using the computer to save
data
If the name of the stitch data file/folder cannot be
identified, for example, because the name
contains special characters, the file/folder is not
displayed. If this occurs, change the name of the
file/folder. We recommend using the 26 letters of
the alphabet (uppercase and lowercase), the
numbers 0 through 9, “-”, and “_”.
Stitch data in a folder created in USB flash drive
can be retrieved. To create file folders, use a
computer.
Saving stitch patterns in the machine’s
memory
You can save often used stitch patterns in the machine’s
memory. Up to 15 stitch patterns (a total of about 128 KB) can
be saved in the machine’s memory.
a
Press .
b
Press .
Press to return to the original screen without
saving.
The “Saving...” screen is displayed. When the pattern
is saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.
Using The Memory Function
Note
Only a USB flash drive can be connected to the
USB port on this machine.
Some USB flash drives may not be usable with
this machine. Please visit our website for more
details.
The access lamp will begin blinking after
inserting USB flash drive, and it will take about 5
to 6 seconds to recognize the Media. (Time will
differ depending on the USB flash drive).
For additional information, refer to the instruction
manual included with the USB flash drive that
you have purchased.
Note
Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving...” screen is displayed. You will lose the
stitch pattern you are saving.
Memo
It takes a few seconds to save a stitch pattern.
See page D-16 for information on retrieving a
saved stitch pattern.
Using The Memory Function
Decorative sewing D-15
CHARACTER / DECORATIVE STITCHES
D
If the memory is full
If the following screen appears while you are trying to
save a pattern on the machine’s memory, the memory is
too full to hold the currently selected stitch pattern. To
save the stitch pattern in the machine’s memory, you have
to delete a previously saved stitch pattern.
a
Press .
Press to return to the original screen without
saving.
b
Choose a stitch pattern to delete.
Press / to move to the previous/next page.
Press if you decide not to delete the stitch
pattern.
c
Press .
A confirmation message appears.
d
Press .
If you decide not to delete the stitch pattern, press
.
The machine deletes the stitch pattern, then
automatically saves the new stitch pattern.
Saving stitch patterns to USB flash drive
When sending stitch patterns from the machine to USB flash
drive, plug the USB flash drive into the machine’s USB port.
a
Press .
b
Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port on the
machine.
1 USB port
2 USB flash drive
c
Press .
Press to return to the original screen without
saving.
The “Saving...” screen is displayed. When the pattern
is saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.
The pattern is saved in a folder labeled “bPocket”.
Memo
USB flash drive is commercially available, but
some USB flash drives may not be usable with
this machine. Please visit our website
“ http://support.brother.com/
” for more details.
The USB flash drive can be inserted or removed
at any time except when saving or deleting.
Note
The processing speed may vary by quantity of
data.
Note
Do not insert or remove USB flash drive while
“Saving...” screen is displayed. You will lose
some or all of the pattern you are saving.
Using The Memory Function
D-16
Retrieving stitch patterns from the machine’s
memory
a
Press .
The pocket selection screen will then appear.
b
Choose a stitch pattern to retrieve.
If the entire saved stitch pattern is not displayed,
press the thumbnail.
Press to return to the original screen without
selecting a pattern.
c
Press .
The selected stitch pattern is retrieved and the
character/decorative stitch editing screen will be
displayed.
Press to delete the stitch pattern.
Recalling from USB flash drive
You can recall a specific stitch pattern from USB flash drive. If
the stitch pattern is in a folder, check each folder to find the
stitch pattern.
a
Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port on the
machine.
1 USB port
2 USB flash drive
b
Press .
c
Select the pattern. If the stitch pattern to be retrieved
is in a folder, press the key for that folder.
Press / to move to the previous/next page.
Press to return to the original screen without
recalling.
Stitch patterns within a folder are displayed.
1 Folder name
2 Stitch patterns in a folder show only the first pattern of
any combined patterns.
Press to return to the previous screen.
Use the computer to create folders. Folders cannot
be created with the machine.
d
Press the key of the stitch pattern you want to recall.
Note
When you press , the selected pattern will be
deleted permanently from the machine's
memory.
1
2
Using The Memory Function
Decorative sewing D-17
CHARACTER / DECORATIVE STITCHES
D
e
Press .
Press to delete the stitch pattern. The pattern will
be deleted from the USB flash drive.
The selected stitch pattern is recalled and the
character/decorative stitch editing screen will be
displayed.
Note
You can recall and sew the MY CUSTOM
STITCH pattern saved in the USB flash drive by
pressing , but it cannot be edited here. If you
want to edit the MY CUSTOM STITCH pattern,
press first, and then press to recall it.
Designing a Stitch
D-18
By using the MY CUSTOM STITCH function, you can
register stitches you have created yourself. You can also
sew designs combining MY CUSTOM STITCH creations
with built-in characters (page D-2).
a
Draw the stitch design on the grid sheet.
b
Decide the spacing of the stitch.
By adjusting the spacing of a stitch, you can create
various patterns with one stitch.
c
Place points where the pattern intersects with the grid,
and connect all the points with a line.
d
Determine the x and y coordinates of each of the
marked points.
Chapter 2
MY CUSTOM STITCH
Designing a Stitch
Memo
Stitches that you create with MY CUSTOM
STITCH can be a maximum of 7 mm (approx. 9/32
inch) wide and 37 mm (approx. 1-1/3 inches) long.
Stitches can be designed more easily with MY
CUSTOM STITCH if you first draw the stitch on
the included grid sheet.
Memo
Simplify the design so that it can be sewn as a
continuous line. For a more attractive stitch, close
the design by intersecting lines.
If the design is to be repeated and linked, the start
point and end point of the design should be at the
same height.
Memo
This will determine the stitch design that will be
sewn.
Designing a Stitch
Decorative sewing D-19
MY CUSTOM STITCH
D
Examples of Custom Stitches
Stitch 123456789101112131415
01218222321171412963136
003610131413111314131063
Stitch 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
12 41 43 40 41 38 35 32 30 32 35 41 45 47 44
00471113141310630047
Stitch 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
45 47 50 54 56 55 51 45 70
11131413106300
Stitch 123456789101112131415
0 3032323233353537353230302926
0017101211812141411538
Stitch 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
24 18 13 12 13 10 12 8 12 7 12 6 10 5 10
1013141412111098663202
Stitch 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
16 19 23 22 17 22 23 19 42
1006106000
Stitch 123456789101112131415
03581217202427293132302724
0581113141413121196310
Stitch 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
21 18 16 15 15 16 18 21 25 28 33 37 41 43 44
0135810121314141311850
Stitch 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
Stitch 123456789101112131415
05458781111111611740
773770773773037
Stitch 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
4 7 11 16 21 20 21 24 23 24 27 27 27 32 27
11 14 11 7 7 11 7 7 14 7 7 11 7 7 11
Stitch 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
23 20 16 20 23 27 32
141173037
Entering Stitch Data
D-20
MY CUSTOM STITCH screen
1 This area displays the stitch being created.
2 Displays the number of the present set point over the total number of points in the stitch.
3 Displays the y-coordinate of over the x-coordinate of .
Entering Stitch Data
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
4 Point delete key Press this key to delete a selected point. D-21
5 Block move key Press this key to group points together and move them together. D-22
6 Insert key Press this key to insert new points on the stitch design. D-22
7 Test key Press this key to sew a test of the stitch. D-21,
D-23
8 Image key Press this key to view an image of the stitch. D-21
9 MY CUSTOM STITCH
memory key
Press this key to store the stitch being created. D-23
0 Single/triple stitching
key
Press this key to select whether one or three stitches will be sewn
between two points.
D-21
A
Arrow keys and set key
Use these keys to move over the display area, and press the set
key in the center to set a point on the stitch design.
D-21,
D-22
B
Point-to-point key
Use these keys to move from point to point on the stitch, or to
the first or last point entered on the stitch.
D-21,
D-22
C Grid direction key Press this key to change the direction of the grid sheet. D-21
D Page scroll key Press this key to scroll the grid sheet.
E Sample pattern retrieve
key
Press this key to display built-in sample patterns that can be edited. D-22
3A1
E
4
6
5
2
0 9 8 7B
C
D
Entering Stitch Data
Decorative sewing D-21
MY CUSTOM STITCH
D
a
Press .
b
Use to move to the coordinates of the first
point on the grid sheet.
Press to change the direction of the grid sheet.
1 Currently selected point/Total number of points
2 Coordinates of
c
Press to add the point indicated by .
d
Select whether one stitch or three stitches will be sewn
between the first two points.
To sew three stitches, press the key so that it appears
as .
e
Use to move to the second point and press
.
f
Repeat the steps above for each point that you have
drawn on the grid sheet until the stitch design is drawn
on the screen as a continuous line.
Pressing each key to perform the following
operation.
: Delete a selected point entered.
: Sew a test-run of the stitch.
: View an image of the stitch.
Press to return to the original screen.
g
The stitch pattern is stored in the machine's memory or
on the USB flash drive and can be retrieved to be sewn.
For details, refer to “Using Stored Custom Stitches”
on page D-23.
Moving a point
a
Press or to move to the point that you want
to move.
To move to the first point, press .
To move to the last point, press .
b
Use to move the point.
2
1
Memo
If you have entered points that are too close
together, the fabric may not feed properly. Edit
the stitch data to leave a larger space between
points.
If the stitch design is to be repeated and linked,
make sure that linking stitches are added so that
the stitch designs will not overlap.
1 Linking stitches
Entering Stitch Data
D-22
Moving part or all of the design
a
Press or to move to the first point of the
section that you want to move.
To move to the first point, press .
To move to the last point, press .
b
Press .
The selected point and all points that were entered
after it are selected.
c
Press or to move the section.
d
Press .
The section will be moved.
Inserting new points
a
Press or to move to a place on the design
where you want to add a new point.
To move to the first point, press .
To move to the last point, press .
b
Press .
A new point is entered and moves to it.
c
Use to move the point.
Editing a built-in sample pattern
Sample patterns can be retrieved and edited in MY CUSTOM
STITCH.
a
Press .
The built-in sample patterns that can be edited are
displayed.
Sample patterns are divided into categories. Press a
tab at the top of the screen to display the desired
pattern.
1 Tab
b
Select a pattern, and then press .
The selected pattern appears in the page.
c
Edit the pattern.
For details on editing the stitch pattern, refer to
“Entering Stitch Data” on page D-20.
If the error message is displayed
This following message appears when the sample pattern
that you try to add with the MY CUSTOM STITCH
function extends out of the stitching area. Select a different
pattern, or delete the existing pattern (point).
Note
For details on saving the edited pattern, refer to
“Storing custom stitches in your list” on
page D-23.
Memo
Sample patterns can be combined and edited.
a
Using Stored Custom Stitches
Decorative sewing D-23
MY CUSTOM STITCH
D
Storing custom stitches in your list
Stitch patterns created using the MY CUSTOM STITCH
function can be stored for later use. Once you finish entering
the stitch data, press and then press either or .
When you save the pattern to USB flash drive, it is saved in a
folder labeled “bPocket”. The “Saving...” message appears
and the stitch will be stored.
Before storing a stitch, press to sew a test-run of the stitch.
If the memory is full
If the following message appears after is pressed, the
stitch pattern cannot be stored because either the
machine’s memory is full or the stitch pattern being stored
is larger than the amount of space available in the
memory. To be able to store the stitch pattern in the
machine’s memory, a previously stored stitch pattern must
be deleted.
Retrieving stored stitches
a
Press .
b
Press or to select the location of the pattern to
be retrieved.
c
Select the stitch pattern.
Press / to move to the previous/next page.
Press to return to the previous screen without
retrieving.
d
Press .
To delete the stored stitch pattern, press .
To edit the stored stitch pattern, press .
Using Stored Custom Stitches
Memo
Storing a stitch pattern takes a few seconds.
For details on retrieving a stored stitch pattern,
see page D-23.
Note
Do not turn off the machine while the “Saving...
message is displayed, otherwise the stitch
pattern data being saved may be lost.
Note
When a retrieved pattern is saved after it has
been edited, the edited pattern is saved as a
different file.
Using Stored Custom Stitches
D-24
Embroidering
This section provides instruction to embroider designs with this machine.
Page number starts with “E” in this section.
The screen display and machine illustration may vary slightly, depending on the countries or
regions.
Chapter1 EMBROIDERY ............................................................ E-2
Selecting Patterns
E-2
Prepare the machine for embroidery according to the
instructions on “STARTING TO EMBROIDER” of “Basic
operations”.
Selecting embroidery patterns/Brother
“Exclusives”/floral alphabet patterns
a
Select the category of the pattern.
b
Press the key of the desired pattern.
The pattern is displayed in the left part of the screen.
c
Press .
The pattern selected is outlined in red.
d
Proceed to “Editing Patterns” on page E-5 to edit the
pattern.
Selecting character patterns
Example: Entering “We Fly”.
a
Press .
b
Press the key of the font you want to embroider.
Chapter 1
EMBROIDERY
Selecting Patterns
1 Embroidery patterns
2 Brother “Exclusives”
3 Floral alphabet patterns
4 Character patterns
5 Frame patterns
6 Press this key to position the embroidery unit for
storage.
7 Patterns saved in the machine’s memory (page E-32)
8 Patterns saved in USB flash drive (page E-33)
Memo
See included “Embroidery Design Guide” for
more information on each category’s selection
screen.
ab
c
f
e
hgd
Selecting Patterns
Embroidering E-3
EMBROIDERY
E
c
Press to display “W” on the screen, and then enter
“W”.
The number located on the left side of the text input
box at the top of the screen indicates the current line
number.
1 Current line number
After selecting a character if you would like to
change the character size press . The size
changes each time you press the key, from large to
medium to small.
d
Press to display “e” on the screen, and then enter
“e”.
If you make a mistake, press to erase the mistake.
If the pattern is too small to see clearly, you can use
the key to check it.
If you want to add multiple lines, refer to “Entering a
line feed” on page E-4.
e
Press , and then press to enter a space.
f
Press , and then enter “F”.
g
Press to display “l” and “y”, and enter them.
h
Press .
The editing screen is displayed.
i
Proceed to “Editing Patterns” on page E-5 to edit the
pattern.
For details on editing characters, refer to “Editing
Character Patterns” on page E-9.
To return to the previous screen to select another
pattern, press .
Memo
If you continue adding characters after changing
the size, the new characters will be entered in the
new size.
a
Selecting Patterns
E-4
Entering a line feed
Using the line feed key, multiple lines of text can be
entered. Each line becomes a group, each of which can be
edited one at a time.
Example: Entering “High” in the second line of the
following screen
a
Press .
b
Enter “High”.
c
Press .
The editing screen is displayed.
Selecting frame patterns
a
Press .
b
Press the key of the frame shape you want to
embroidery.
c
Press the key of the frame pattern you want to
embroidery.
If you make a mistake selecting the pattern, press the
key of the pattern you want to embroider.
The selected pattern is displayed on the screen.
d
Press .
The editing screen is displayed.
e
Proceed to “Editing Patterns” on page E-5 to edit the
pattern.
To return to the previous screen to select another
pattern, press .
Memo
To change the text before the line feed in the text
input screen, press , also to delete any text
after the line feed.
When is pressed to change the character
size, the size of characters in the displayed line of
text is changed. To change the size of characters
in a different line of text, press to erase text
until the line to be changed appears, or resize the
pattern in the pattern editing screen.
We recommend pressing before entering a
line feed in order to preview the pattern.
Editing Patterns
Embroidering E-5
EMBROIDERY
E
When a pattern is selected in the pattern selection screen and is pressed, the pattern editing screen appears. To finish
editing, press to continue to the embroidery settings screen.
Pattern editing screen
Editing Patterns
Memo
If a key display is light gray, you cannot use that function with the selected pattern.
CAUTION
When you have revised the pattern, check the display of available embroidery frames and use an
appropriate frame. If you use an embroidery frame not displayed as available for use, the presser foot may
strike the frame and possibly cause injury.
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
1 Embroidery frame Shows the embroidery frames that can be used. In addition, after pressing the key for
the embroidery frame to be used, “Embroidery Frame Identification View” can be set
to “ON.
E-29
2 Pattern size Shows the size of the entire combined pattern.
3 Magnify key Press this key to magnify the pattern in the screen. E-8
4 Preview key Press this key to show sewn image. For details, refer to “Previewing the selected
pattern” in the “Basic operations” section.
5 Rotate key Press this key to rotate the pattern. You can rotate a pattern one degree, ten degrees
or ninety degrees at a time.
E-7
6 Thread palette key Press this key to change the colors of the displayed pattern. E-7
7 Delete key Press this key to delete the selected pattern (the pattern outlined by the red box). E-8
8 Font edit key Press this key to display the font editing screen. For details, refer to “Editing
Character Patterns”.
E-9
9 Edit End key Press this key to call up the embroidery settings screen. For details, refer to “Editing
All Patterns”.
E-15
0 Memory key Press this key to save patterns to the machine's memory or USB flash drive. E-31
A Pattern select key When a combined pattern is selected, use these keys to select a part of the pattern to
edit.
E-14
B Add key Press this key to add another embroidery pattern to currently displayed pattern. E-13
C Horizontal mirror image
key
Press this key to make a horizontal mirror image of the selected pattern. E-7
D Thread density key Press this key to change thread density for some alphabet character and frame
patterns.
E-8
E Move key Press these keys to move the pattern. E-6
F Size key Press this key to change the size of the pattern. Patterns can be enlarged or reduced. E-6
1 234
6
7
B A 0 9
E
8
C
5
F
D
Editing Patterns
E-6
Moving the pattern
a
Press .
b
Use to move the pattern in the direction shown
by the arrow.
Press to center the pattern.
1 Distance from the center
c
Press to return to the original screen.
Changing the size of the pattern
a
Press .
b
Select the direction in which to change the size.
Pressing each key to change shape of the pattern as
follows.
: Enlarge the pattern proportionately.
: Shrink the pattern proportionately.
: Stretch the pattern horizontally.
: Compact the pattern horizontally.
: Stretch the pattern vertically.
: Compact the pattern vertically.
: Return the pattern to its original size.
1 Size of the pattern
c
Press to return to the original screen.
Memo
The pattern can also be moved by dragging it.
Patterns cannot be moved in screens where
does not appear.
1
Memo
Some patterns or characters can be enlarged
more than others.
Some patterns or characters can be enlarged to a
greater degree if they are rotated 90 degrees.
1
Editing Patterns
Embroidering E-7
EMBROIDERY
E
Rotating the pattern
a
Press .
b
Select the angle of rotation for the pattern.
Pressing each key to rotate the pattern as follows.
: Rotate the pattern 90 degrees to the left.
: Rotate the pattern 90 degrees to the right.
: Rotate the pattern 10 degrees to the left.
: Rotate the pattern 10 degrees to the right.
: Rotate the pattern 1 degree to the left.
: Rotate the pattern 1 degree to the right.
Press to return the pattern to its original
position.
1 Degree of rotation
c
Press to return to the original screen.
Changing the thread color
You can change the thread color by choosing a new color
from the thread colors in the machine.
a
In the pattern editing screen, press .
The thread color palette screen displays.
b
Press or to select the color you want to change.
c
Press or touch the color on the color
palette to choose a new color.
To return to the original color, press , then press
after message appears. If multiple colors have
been changed, this command will return all colors to
their original colors.
1 Color palette
The display shows the changed colors.
d
Press .
Creating a horizontal mirror image
Press so it appears as to create a horizontal mirror
image of the selected pattern. Press again to return the
pattern to normal.
1
1
Editing Patterns
E-8
Changing the density (alphabet character
and frame patterns only)
The thread density for some alphabet character and frame
patterns can be changed.
A setting between 80% and 120% in 5% increments can be
specified.
a
Press .
b
Change the density.
Press to make the pattern less dense.
Press to make the pattern more dense.
1 Normal
2 Fine (stitches closer together)
3 Coarse (stitches farther apart)
The pattern density changes each time you press a
button.
c
Press .
Deleting the pattern
Press to delete the pattern from the screen.
Displaying patterns in the screen
magnification
a
Press .
Magnification select screen is displayed.
b
Press desired magnification to enlarge the pattern.
Press to return to the normal size.
c
Press to return to the original screen.
After editing
a
Press .
To combine the pattern with other patterns, select
(page E-13).
For more information about sewing patterns, refer to
“Embroidering a pattern” in the “Basic operations”
section.
Memo
If you want to return to the editing screen after
pressing , press .
Editing Character Patterns
Embroidering E-9
EMBROIDERY
E
Font editing screen appears by pressing on the pattern
editing screen.
Font editing screen
Changing the colors of alphabet character
patterns
Combined alphabet character patterns can be sewn with each
letter in a different color. If “Multi Color” is set, the machine
stops after each character is sewn so that the thread can be
changed to a different color.
a
Press so that it appears as .
Press the key again to return to the original setting.
b
Press to return to the pattern editing screen.
Press to change the colors in the sewing order
(see page E-7).
c
After a character is sewn, change the thread color, and
then sew the next character.
Switching between text written vertically
and horizontally
When the Japanese font is selected, the text can be switched
between being written vertically and horizontally.
a
Press to switch between text written vertically
and horizontally.
b
Press to return to the pattern editing screen.
Editing Character Patterns
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
1 Multi color
key
Press this key to
change the color of
individual characters
in a pattern.
E-9
2 Array key Press this key to
change the
configuration of a
character pattern.
E-12
3 Font key Press this key to
change the font of the
selected characters.
E-10
4 Vertical/hori
zontal text
key
Press this key to
switch between text
written vertically and
horizontally.
E-9
5 Edit
character
key
Press this key to edit
each character
separately.
E-11
6 Split text
key
Press this key to split
text between
characters so that
they can be edited
separately.
E-10
7 Character
spacing key
Press this key to
change the spacing
of character patterns.
E-10
8 Select key Press this key to
select a character. If
the line feed key was
used while entering
text, single lines can
be selected.
E-14
1 23 4
7 8 6
5
Note
Western characters cannot be written vertically.
Editing Character Patterns
E-10
Changing the font of entered characters
After text has been entered, the font can be changed.
a
Press .
b
Select the font that you wish to use.
The text appears in the screen with the new font
applied.
Changing character spacing
a
Press .
b
Press / to increase or decrease the character
spacing.
Press to return the pattern to its original
appearance.
c
Press to return to the font editing screen.
Separating combined character patterns
Combined character patterns can be separated to adjust the
character spacing or to separately edit the patterns after all
characters have been entered.
a
Press .
b
Use to select where the pattern is to be
separated, and then press to separate it. For this
example, the pattern will be separated between “A”
and “B”.
Note
Depending on the font that was selected, it may
not be possible to change the font.
Note
Reducing character spacing
The spacing between characters can be reduced
to 50% of the narrowest character in the group.
It is not recommended to edit data and transfer
to other or older version machines. Same
features do not apply in other machines, so
problems may occur.
Character spacing can be reduced only when
characters are arranged normally on a straight
line.
Note
A separated character pattern cannot be
combined again.
Editing Character Patterns
Embroidering E-11
EMBROIDERY
E
c
Press to return to the font editing screen.
Editing single characters
Press so that a single character can be selected for editing.
The character size and font can be changed.
Changing the size
a
Press .
b
Select the character to be resized.
To select the character, press or .
The selected character is surrounded with a red box.
c
Select the direction in which to change the size.
For details on the various keys, refer to the procedure
in “Changing the size of the pattern” on page E-6.
d
Press to return to the font editing screen.
Changing the font
a
Press .
b
Press , and then select the character whose font is
to be changed.
To select the character, press or .
The selected character is surrounded with a red box.
c
Select the font that you wish to use.
The character changes to the selected font.
d
Press to return to the font editing screen.
Editing Character Patterns
E-12
Changing the configuration of character
patterns
a
Press .
b
Press the key of the layout you want to embroider.
When selecting an arc, use and to change
the degree of the arc.
: Make the arc flatter.
: Make the arc rounder.
The display will show the selected layout.
Example:
c
Press to return to the font editing screen.
Memo
When selecting , and change to
and . You can increase or decrease the
incline.
Combining Patterns
Embroidering E-13
EMBROIDERY
E
Editing combined patterns
Example: Combining alphabet characters with an
embroidery pattern and editing
a
Press to select an embroidery pattern.
b
Select the following pattern and then press .
c
Press .
d
Press to enter the alphabet characters.
Press to return to the previous screen.
e
Select and enter “Happy”.
The characters you enter will be displayed in the
upper part of the screen.
f
Press .
g
Press .
h
Press to move the characters.
With your finger, drag the characters to move them.
i
Press to return to the pattern editing screen.
j
Press and to change the layout of the
characters. Press two times to return to the
pattern editing screen.
See page E-12 for more information about changing
the layout.
k
Press to change the color of the characters.
The thread color palette screen displays.
See page E-7 for more information about changing
the color.
l
Press to return to the pattern editing screen.
Combining Patterns
Combining Patterns
E-14
m
When all editing is finished, press and then .
Embroidering screen appears.
Selecting combined embroidery patterns
If multiple patterns have been combined, use to
select the pattern to be edited. In addition, patterns can be
selected by directly touching the screen with your finger.
Embroidering combined patterns
Combined patterns will be embroidered in the order they
were entered. In this example, the embroidery order will be as
follows:
For more information about sewing patterns, refer to
“Embroidering a pattern” in the “Basic operations”
section.
a
Embroider the pattern by following the color order on
the display.
After the patterns are embroidered, the [+] cursor will
move to the character part of the pattern.
b
Embroider characters.
Memo
Use to select patterns that are overlapping
and cannot be selected by touching the screen.
Editing All Patterns
Embroidering E-15
EMBROIDERY
E
When is pressed in the editing screen, the embroidery
settings screen appears. After editing the pattern, press
to continue to the embroidering screen.
Embroidery settings screen
Moving the pattern
Press to move the entire pattern.
For details, refer to “Checking the pattern position” in the
“Basic operations” section.
Rotating the pattern
Press to rotate the entire pattern.
For details, refer to “Rotating the pattern” on page E-7.
Aligning the pattern and the needle
Example: Aligning the lower left side of a pattern and the
needle
a
Mark the embroidery start position on the fabric, as
shown.
b
Press .
c
Press .
1 Start position
2 This key is used for aligning linked characters.
(page E-16)
The needle position moves to the bottom left corner
of the pattern (the embroidery frame moves so that
the needle is positioned correctly).
d
Press .
Editing All Patterns
No. Display Key Name Explanation Page
1 Move key Press these keys to move
the pattern in the direction
shown by the arrow. (Press
the center key to return the
pattern to the center of the
embroidery area.)
E-15
2 Rotate key Press this key to rotate the
entire pattern.
E-15
3 Embroidery
key
Press this key to enter the
embroidery screen.
4 Memory key Press this key to save
patterns to the machine's
memory or USB flash drive.
E-31
5 Trial key Press this key to check the
position of the pattern. The
embroidery frame moves
so you can check that there
is enough space to sew
pattern. For details, refer to
“Checking the pattern
position” in the “Basic
operations” section.
6 Starting
point key
Press this key to move the
needle start position to
align the needle with the
pattern position.
E-15
1
2
6 5 4
3
2
1
Editing All Patterns
E-16
e
Use to align the needle and the mark on the
fabric, and begin embroidering the pattern.
Embroidering linked characters
Follow the procedure described below to embroider linked
characters in a single row when the entire pattern extends
beyond the embroidery frame.
Example: Linking “GHIJK” to the characters “ABCDEF”
using embroidery frame 18 cm × 13 cm (7 inches ×
5 inches)
* The characters will be embroidered rotated by 90
degrees.
a
Select the character patterns for “ABCDEF”, and then
press and .
b
Press .
c
Press , and then press .
The needle is positioned in the lower-left corner of
the pattern. The embroidery frame moves so that the
needle is positioned correctly.
d
Press .
e
Lower the embroidery foot and then press the
“Start/Stop” button to begin embroidering.
Memo
When using the extra large (multi-position)
embroidery frame*, align the top installation
position with the two pins on the embroidery
frame holder, and then press the frame down until
it snaps into place.
* Sold separately with some models.
1 Top installation position
a
Note
After entering the “ABCD” when the “E” is
selected, a message appears and you need to
select the to rotate 90 degrees to the right
before continuing with the “EF”.
The message may appear before you enter the
“ABCD”. The number of characters differs
depending on the type of the selected font.
For details on selecting character patterns, refer
to “Selecting character patterns” on page E-2.
Note
To cancel the starting point setting and return
the starting point to the center of the pattern,
press .
Use to select a different starting point for
embroidering.
Editing All Patterns
Embroidering E-17
EMBROIDERY
E
f
After the characters are embroidered, cut the threads,
remove the embroidery frame, and then press for
“Finished embroidering”.
1 End of the embroidering
g
Reposition the fabric in embroidery frame so that the
right side of the letter “F” will be partially inside the
embroidery frame; being careful so letters remain
straight and level. Then reattach frame again so that
the remaining characters (“GHIJK”) can be
embroidered.
h
Press and then press .
i
Select the character patterns for “GHIJK”, and then
press .
j
Press and select to rotate 90 degrees to the
right, and then press .
k
Press .
l
Press .
m
Press , and then press .
The needle is positioned in the lower-left corner of
the pattern. The embroidery frame moves so that the
needle is positioned correctly.
n
Use to align the needle with the end of the
embroidering for the previous pattern.
o
Press .
p
Lower the embroidery foot and press the “Start/Stop”
button to begin embroidering the remaining character
patterns.
Memo
When using the extra large (multi-position)
embroidery frame*, align the bottom installation
position with the two pins on the embroidery
frame holder, and then press the frame down until
it snaps into place. The remaining characters
(“GHIJK”) can be embroidered without
repositioning the fabric.
* Sold separately with some models.
1 Bottom installation position
a
a
Embroidery Applications
E-18
Sewing embroidery patterns which use
appliqué
When the color sewing order display shows
(APPLIQUE MATERIAL),
(APPLIQUE POSITION) or
(APPLIQUE), follow the procedure below.
1. Creating an appliqué piece
È
2. Sewing the appliqué position on the base fabric
È
3. Affixing the appliqué piece to the base fabric
È
4. Embroidering the remainder of the pattern
Required materials
Fabric for the appliqué piece
Fabric for the appliqué base
Stabilizer material
Craft glue
Embroidering thread
1. Creating an appliqué piece
a
Select the appliqué pattern, and then continue to the
embroidering screen.
b
Attach stabilizer material to the wrong side of the
appliqué fabric.
Hoop the fabric in the embroidery frame, and then
attach the embroidery frame to the embroidery unit.
1 Applique material (cotton, felt, etc.)
2 Iron-on stabilizer
c
Thread the machine with the embroidery thread, lower
the presser foot lever, and then press the “Start/Stop”
button to sew the cutting line of the appliqué piece.
The outline of the appliqué piece is sewn, and then
the machine stops.
1 Outline of applique
2 Applique material
d
Remove the fabric for the appliqué piece from the
embroidery frame, and then carefully cut along the
sewn cutting line
Embroidery Applications
Note
•If (APPLIQUE MATERIAL),
(APPLIQUE POSITION) or
(APPLIQUE) appear in the thread
color list, the correct names and numbers of the
thread colors to be used will not appear. Select
the thread colors depending on those in the
appliqué pattern.
Note
If the appliqué piece is cut out along the inside of
the cutting line, it may not be correctly attached
to the fabric. Therefore, carefully cut out the
appliqué piece along the cutting line.
After cutting out the appliqué piece, carefully
remove the thread.
Embroidery Applications
Embroidering E-19
EMBROIDERY
E
2. Sewing the appliqué position on the base
fabric
a
Attach stabilizer material to the wrong side of the
fabric for the appliqué base.
Hoop the fabric in the embroidery frame, and then
attach the embroidery frame to the embroidery unit.
b
Thread the machine with the embroidery thread, lower
the presser foot lever, and then press the “Start/Stop
button to sew the appliqué position.
The position of the appliqué is sewn, and then the
machine stops.
1 Position of applique
2 Base material
c
Remove the embroidery frame from the embroidery
unit.
3. Affixing the appliqué piece to the base
fabric
a
Lightly apply craft glue to the back of the appliqué
piece, and then attach it to the base fabric within the
outline of the position sewn in step
b of “2. Sewing
the appliqué position on the base fabric”.
b
After the appliqué piece is attached, attach the
embroidery frame to the machine.
Thread the machine with the embroidery thread, lower
the presser foot lever, and then press the “Start/Stop
button to sew the appliqué.
The appliqué piece is sewn to the base fabric, and
then the machine stops.
Note
Do not remove the base fabric from the
embroidery frame until all sewing is finished.
Note
If the appliqué piece is not securely attached to
the base fabric, the appliqué piece may lift off
the base fabric during sewing, causing
misalignment.
If the appliqué piece cannot be attached to the
base fabric with craft glue, securely baste it in
place with basting stitches.
If thin fabric is used for the appliqué piece,
reinforce and secure it in place with an iron-on
adhesive sheet. An iron can be used to attach
the appliqué piece to the appliqué location.
Before attaching the appliqué piece to the base
fabric, do not remove the fabric from the
embroidery frame.
Memo
Depending on the pattern that is selected,
(APPLIQUE MATERIAL),
(APPLIQUE POSITION) and
(APPLIQUE) for all three steps may
not appear. If (APPLIQUE) appears
as a color, embroider using thread of that color.
Embroidery Applications
E-20
4. Embroidering the remainder of the pattern
a
Change the embroidery thread according to the thread
color sewing order, and then finish embroidering the
remainder of the pattern.
Using a frame pattern to make an appliqué
(1)
You can use framed patterns of the same size and shape to
create an appliqué. Embroider one pattern with a straight
stitch and one pattern with a satin stitch.
a
Select a straight stitch frame pattern. Embroider the
pattern onto the appliqué material, then cut neatly
around the outside of the shape.
b
Embroider the same pattern from step a onto the
base fabric.
c
Apply a thin layer of fabric glue or a temporary spray
adhesive to the rear of the appliqué created in step a.
Attach the appliqué to the base fabric matching the
shapes.
d
Select the satin stitch frame pattern of the same shape
as the appliqué. Embroider over the appliqué and base
fabric from step c to create the appliqué.
Memo
Since glue may become attached to the presser
foot, needle or needle plate, clean the glue off of
the parts after finishing embroidering the appliqué
pattern.
For best results, trim all excess threads each time
the thread color is changed.
Note
If you change the size or position of the patterns
when selecting them, make a note of the size
and location.
1 Appliqué material
Embroidery Applications
Embroidering E-21
EMBROIDERY
E
Using a frame pattern to make an appliqué
(2)
This is a second method to make appliqué using embroidery
patterns. You do not have to change the fabric in the
embroidery frame using this method. Embroider one pattern
with a straight stitch and one pattern with a satin stitch.
a
Select a straight stitch frame pattern, and embroider
the pattern onto the base fabric.
b
Place the appliqué fabric over the pattern embroidered
in step
a.
Be sure that the appliqué fabric completely covers
the stitched line.
c
Embroider the same pattern on the appliqué fabric.
d
Remove the embroidery frame from the embroidery
unit, and cut around the outside of the stitches.
e
Select the satin stitch frame pattern of the same shape
as the appliqué.
f
Reattach the embroidery frame to the embroidery unit,
and embroider the satin stitch pattern to create an
appliqué.
Note
Do not remove the fabric from the embroidery
frame to cut it. Also, do not pull or push on the
fabric. Otherwise, the fabric may loosen in the
frame.
Note
Do not change the size or position of the pattern.
If you change the size or position of the patterns
when selecting them, make a note of the size
and location.
1 Appliqué material
Embroidery Applications
E-22
Sewing split embroidery patterns
Split embroidery patterns created with PE-DESIGN Ver.7 or
later, or PE-DESIGN NEXT can be sewn. With split
embroidery patterns, embroidery designs larger than the
embroidery hoop are divided into multiple sections, which
combine to create a single pattern after each section is sewn.
For details on creating split embroidery patterns and for more
detailed sewing instructions, refer to the Instruction manual
included with PE-DESIGN Ver.7 or later, or PE-DESIGN
NEXT.
The following procedure describes how to read the split
embroidery pattern shown below from USB flash drive and
embroider it.
a
Insert the USB flash drive containing the created split
embroidery pattern, and then select the split
embroidery pattern to be embroidered.
For details on recalling patterns, refer to “Recalling
from USB flash drive” on page E-34.
A screen appears so that a section of the split
embroidery pattern can be selected.
b
Select section to be embroidered and press .
Select the sections in alphabetical order.
Press or to display the previous or next page.
c
If necessary, edit the pattern, and press .
d
Press .
For details on editing patterns, refer to “Editing All
Patterns on page E-15.
e
Press the “Start/Stop” button to embroider the pattern
section.
f
When embroidering is finished, the following screen
appears. Press .
A screen appears so that a section of the split
embroidery pattern can be selected.
g
Repeat steps b through f to embroider the
remaining sections of the pattern.
Memo
Press to rotate the pattern.
Adjustments During the Embroidery Process
Embroidering E-23
EMBROIDERY
E
If the bobbin runs out of thread
When the bobbin begins to run out of thread during
embroidering, the machine will stop and the message below
will appear. If very little sewing remains, you can embroider
approximately 10 final stitches without rethreading the
machine by pressing and restarting the machine. The
machine will stop after sewing approximately 10 stitches.
a
Raise the presser foot lever.
b
Cut the threads and press .
The screen changes, and all keys and operation
buttons are locked (except ).
c
While pushing the lever of the embroidery frame
holder to the left, slightly lift the back and then the
front of the embroidery frame up to clear the pins, and
then remove the frame.
Hold the lever lightly to the left.
Be careful not to apply strong force to the fabric at
this time. Otherwise, the fabric may loosen in the
frame.
1 Lever
Remove the back mounting bracket from the pin.
1 Back mounting bracket
2 Back pin
Remove the front mounting bracket from the pin.
1 Front mounting bracket
2 Front pin
d
Remove bobbin cover and insert a wound bobbin into
the machine. (see “Installing the bobbin” of “Basic
operations”.)
e
Reattach the embroidery frame.
f
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
g
To return to the area in the pattern where you stopped
sewing, follow steps
c through f in the next
section.
Adjustments During the Embroidery Process
Note
Be careful not to bump the embroidery unit
carriage or the presser foot when removing or
attaching the embroidery frame. Otherwise, the
pattern will not embroider correctly.
a
a
b
a
b
Adjustments During the Embroidery Process
E-24
If the thread breaks during sewing
a
Press the “Start/Stop” button to stop the machine.
b
If the upper thread is broken, redo the upper
threading. If the bobbin thread is broken, press
and follow the directions in steps
a through f from
the previous section to reset the bobbin.
c
Press .
d
Press , , or to move the needle back the
correct number of stitches before the area where the
thread broke.
e
Press to return to the original screen.
f
Lower the presser foot lever to lower the presser foot,
and press the “Start/Stop” button to continue sewing.
Restarting from the beginning
a
Press .
b
Press .
The embroidery frame moves, returning the needle to
the pattern’s beginning position.
c
Lower the presser foot lever to lower the presser foot
and start sewing.
Resuming embroidery after turning off the
power
The current color and stitch number are saved when
embroidery is stopped. The next time the machine is turned
on, you have the option to continue or delete the pattern.
1 Current stitch number when embroidery was stopped
a
Turn the main power to ON.
b
Follow the instructions shown on the screen and
remove the embroidery frame.
The following message will appear.
Memo
If you cannot move back to the area where the
thread broke, press to select the color and
move to the beginning position of that color, then
use ,
or to move ahead to slightly
before where the thread broke.
Memo
Even if the power goes out in the middle of
embroidery, the machine returns to the point
where embroidery was stopped when the
machine is turned on again.
Note
Do not remove the embroidery unit or the
memory will no longer remember your design.
1
Adjustments During the Embroidery Process
Embroidering E-25
EMBROIDERY
E
c
Attach the embroidery frame and press .
The previous embroidery screen displayed before the
machine was turned off appears.
d
Continue embroidering.
1 Stitch number when embroidery is resumed
Memo
If you want to start a new embroidery pattern,
press so the pattern selection screen
appears.
1
Making Embroidery Adjustments
E-26
Adjusting thread tension
When embroidering, the thread tension should be set so that
the upper thread can slightly be seen on the wrong side of the
fabric.
Correct thread tension
The pattern can be seen from the wrong side of the fabric.
If the thread tension is not set correctly, the pattern will
not finish well. The fabric may pucker or the thread may
break.
1 Right side
2 Wrong side
Follow the operations described below to adjust thread
tension according to the situation.
Upper thread is too tight
The tension of the upper thread is too tight, resulting in the
bobbin thread being visible from the right side of the
fabric.
1 Right side
2 Wrong side
a
Press .
b
Press to weaken the upper thread tension. (The
tension number will decrease.)
c
Press .
Upper thread is too loose
The tension of the upper thread is too loose, resulting in a
loose upper thread, loose thread locks, or loops appearing
on the right side of the fabric.
1 Right side
2 Wrong side
a
Press .
b
Press to tighten the upper thread tension. (The
tension number will increase.)
Making Embroidery Adjustments
Note
If the thread tension setting is made extremely
weak, the machine may stop during sewing. This
is not the sign of a malfunction. Increase the
thread tension slightly, and begin sewing again.
Memo
If you turn the main power to OFF or select a
different pattern, the thread tension will reset to
the automatic setting.
When you retrieve a saved pattern, the thread
tension setting will be the same as when the
pattern was saved.
Note
If the bobbin thread was incorrectly threaded,
the upper thread may be too tight. In this case,
refer to “Installing the bobbin” of “Basic
operations” and rethread the bobbin thread.
Note
If the upper thread was incorrectly threaded, the
upper thread may be too loose. In this case, refer
to “Upper Threading” of “Basic operations” and
rethread the upper thread.
Making Embroidery Adjustments
Embroidering E-27
EMBROIDERY
E
c
Press .
Adjusting the bobbin case (with no color on
the screw)
The bobbin case (with no color on the screw) can be adjusted
when bobbin tension changes are required to accommodate
different bobbin threads. See “Embroidery Attractive Finishes
in the “Basic operations”.
To adjust the bobbin tension for embroidery function, using
the bobbin case (with no color on the screw), turn the
slotted-head screw (-) with a screwdriver (small).
1 Do not turn the phillips screw (+).
2 Adjust with a screwdriver (small).
Correct tension
Upper thread slightly appears on the wrong side of fabric.
1 Right side
2 Wrong side
Bobbin thread is too loose
Bobbin thread appears slightly on the right side of fabric.
1 Right side
2 Wrong side
If this occurs, turn the slotted-head screw (-) clockwise,
being careful not to over-tighten the screw, approximately
30-45 degrees to increase bobbin tension.
Bobbin thread is too tight
Upper thread on the right side of fabric seems to be
lifting/looping and bobbin thread is not seen on the wrong
side of fabric.
1 Right side
2 Wrong side
If this occurs, turn the slotted-head screw (-)
counterclockwise, being careful not to over-loosen the
screw, approximately 30-45 degrees to decrease bobbin
tension.
Note
With “Embroidery Tension” on the setting
screen, the tension of the upper thread can be
adjusted for embroidering. The selected setting
will be applied to all patterns.
When embroidering, if the overall tension of the
upper thread is too tight or too loose, adjust it
from the setting screen. Press to tighten the
upper thread tension and press to loosen the
upper tension. If an individual embroidery pattern
needs additional fine tuning, refer to “Adjusting
thread tension” on page E-26.
CAUTION
When adjusting the bobbin case, be sure to
remove the bobbin from the bobbin case.
DO NOT adjust the position of the phillips (+)
screw on the bobbin case as this may result in
damage to the bobbin case, rendering it
unusable.
If the slotted-head screw (-) is difficult to turn,
do not use force. Turning the screw too much
or providing force in either (rotational)
direction may cause damage to the bobbin
case. Should damage occur, the bobbin case
may not maintain proper tension.
Making Embroidery Adjustments
E-28
Using the automatic thread cutting function
(END COLOR TRIM)
The automatic thread cutting function will cut the thread at
the end of sewing each color. This function is initially turned
on. To turn this function off, press key and then . This
function can be turned on or off during embroidering.
a
Press .
b
Press to turn off the automatic thread cutting
function.
The key will display as
When one color thread is sewn, the machine will
stop without cutting the thread.
c
Press to return to the original screen.
Adjusting the embroidery speed
a
Press to display the following screen.
b
Change the “Max Embroidery Speed” by pressing
/.
c
Press to return to the original screen.
Changing the “Embroidery Frame Display”
a
Press to display the following screen.
b
In the “Embroidery Frame Display”, use / to
change the embroidery frame display mode.
To change the frame
* Sold separately with some models.
1 Large frame embroidering area
18 cm × 13 cm (7 inches × 5 inches)
Extra large (multi-position) frame embroidering area
*
18 cm × 13 cm (7 inches × 5 inches)
2 Medium frame embroidering area
*
10 cm × 10 cm (4 inches × 4 inches)
3 Embroidery area for small embroidery frame
*
2 cm × 6 cm (1 inch × 2-1/2 inches)
Memo
“spm” is the number of stitches sewn in one
minute.
Decrease the embroidery speed when
embroidering on thin, thick, or heavy fabrics.
The sewing speed can be changed after an
embroidery pattern has been started.
The maximum embroidery speed setting does not
change until a new setting is selected. The setting
specified before the main power is set to OFF
remains selected the next time that the machine is
turned on.
Decrease to a slower spm when using a special
thread like a metallic thread.
abc
Making Embroidery Adjustments
Embroidering E-29
EMBROIDERY
E
To change the center mark and grid lines
1 Center mark
2 Grid lines
c
Press to return to the original screen.
Selecting/displaying patterns according to
the embroidery frame size
If “Embroidery Frame Identification View” in the settings
screen is set to “ON”, the pattern can be edited in the screen
as if that embroidery frame is attached.
When “Embroidery Frame Identification View” is set to
“OFF”.
1 The embroidery frames that can be used with the
selected pattern are displayed.
2 The embroidering area for the large/extra large
(multi-position) frame is displayed.
When “Embroidery Frame Identification View” is set to
“ON”.
1 The embroidery frame selected when “Embroidery
Frame Identification View” is set to “ON” is highlighted.
2 The embroidering area for the selected frame is
displayed.
3 Patterns that will not fit in the selected frame appear
shaded and cannot be selected.
b
a
1
2
Memo
Patterns that cannot be sewn in the selected
embroidery frame will not be available in the
pattern selection screen.
The pattern will be enlarged or reduced within the
embroidering area for the selected embroidery
frame.
When enlarging the pattern by pressing on
the editing screen, it is enlarged to 100% of the
size for the selected embroidery frame.
The “Embroidery Frame Identification View”
function is canceled when the key for the selected
embroidery frame (Example: ) is pressed.
To change the embroidery frame selected with the
“Embroidery Frame Identification View” function,
press the key for the desired embroidery frame.
3
1
2
Making Embroidery Adjustments
E-30
Changing the background colors of the
embroidery patterns
In the settings screen, the background colors can be changed
for the embroidery pattern and pattern thumbnails.
Depending on the pattern color, select the desired
background color from the 66 settings available. Different
background colors can be selected for the embroidery pattern
and pattern thumbnails.
a
Press to display the following screen.
1 Embroidery pattern background
2 Pattern thumbnails background
b
Press .
c
Select the background color from the 66 available
settings.
1 Embroidery pattern background
2 Selected color
1 Pattern thumbnails background
2 Selected color
d
Press twice to return to the original screen.
Specifying the size of pattern thumbnails
The thumbnails for selecting an embroidery pattern can be set
to be displayed at the smaller size or a larger size. The larger
size is 1.5 times the smaller size.
a
Press to display the following screen.
b
Press or to select the desired thumbnail size.
c
Press to return to the original screen.
Memo
The setting remains selected even if the machine
is turned off.
1
2
2
1
2
1
Using the Memory Function
Embroidering E-31
EMBROIDERY
E
Embroidery data precautions
Observe the following precautions when using embroidery
data other than that created and saved in this machine.
Types of embroidery data that can be used
Only .pes, .phc, and .dst embroidery data files
can be used with this machine. Using data other
than that saved using our data design systems or
machines may cause the embroidery machine to
malfunction.
Types of USB media that can be used
Stitch data can be saved to or recalled from a USB flash
drive of any size.
Precautions on using the computer to create
and save data
If the name of the embroidery data file/folder
cannot be identified, for example, because the
name contains special characters, the file/folder
is not displayed. If this occurs, change the name
of the file/folder. We recommend using the 26
letters of the alphabet (uppercase and
lowercase), the numbers 0 through 9,”-”, and
“_”.
If embroidery data larger than 18 cm × 13 cm
(approx. 7 inches × 5 inches) is selected, the
pattern will be displayed rotated by 90 degrees
when it is read out.
Even after being rotated 90 degrees, embroidery
data larger than 18 cm × 13 cm (approx. 7 inches
× 5 inches) cannot be used.
(All designs must be within the 18 cm × 13 cm
(approx. 7 inches × 5 inches) design field size.)
.pes files saved with the number of stitches or the
number of colors exceeding the specified limits
cannot be displayed. The combined design can
not exceed a maximum number of 200,000
stitches or a maximum number of 125 color
changes (Above numbers are approximate,
depending on the overall size of the design). Use
one of our design software programs to edit the
embroidery pattern so that it meets these
specifications.
Embroidery data stored in a folder created in
USB flash drive can be retrieved.
Even if the embroidery unit is not attached, the
machine will recognize embroidery data.
Tajima (.dst) embroidery data
.dst data is displayed in the pattern list screen by
file name (the actual image cannot be displayed).
Since Tajima (.dst) data does not contain specific
thread color information, it is displayed with our
default thread color sequence. Check the
preview and change the thread colors as desired.
Using the Memory Function
CAUTION
When using embroidery data other than our
original patterns, the thread or needle may
break when sewing with a stitch density that is
too fine or when sewing three or more
overlapping stitches. In that case, use one of
our original data design systems to edit the
embroidery data.
Note
The processing speed may vary by quantity of
data stored.
Only a USB flash drive can be connected to the
USB port on this machine.
The access lamp will begin blinking after
inserting USB flash drive, and it will take about 5
to 6 seconds to recognize the drive. (Time will
differ depending on the USB flash drive).
For additional information, refer to the instruction
manual included with the USB flash drive that
you have purchased.
Memo
To create file folders, use a computer.
Using the Memory Function
E-32
Saving embroidery patterns in the machine’s
memory
You can save embroidery patterns that you have customized
and will use often; for example, your name, patterns that have
been rotated or had the size changed, patterns that have had
the sewing position changed, etc. A total of about 1 MB of
patterns can be saved in the machine's memory.
a
Press when the pattern you want to save is in the
pattern editing screen or embroidery settings screen.
b
Press .
Press to return to the original screen without
saving.
The “Saving...” screen is displayed. When the pattern
is saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.
If the memory is full
If the following screen appears, either the maximum
number of patterns have been saved or the pattern you
want to save uses a lot of memory, and the machine
cannot save it. If you delete a previously saved pattern,
you can save the current pattern.
a
Press .
Press to return to the original screen without
saving.
The machine displays the patterns currently saved.
b
Select the pattern you want to delete.
Press / to move to the previous/next page.
c
Press .
1 Amount of memory used by the pattern to be deleted
2 Amount of machine’s memory
d
Press .
If you decide not to delete the pattern, press .
The “Saving...” screen displays. When the pattern is
saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.
Note
Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving...” screen is displayed. You will lose the
pattern you are saving.
Memo
It takes a few seconds to save a pattern to the
machine’s memory.
See page E-34 for information on retrieving a
saved pattern.
Note
Do not turn the main power to OFF while the
“Saving...” screen is displayed. You will lose the
pattern you are saving.
1
2
Using the Memory Function
Embroidering E-33
EMBROIDERY
E
Saving embroidery patterns to USB flash
drive
When sending embroidery patterns from the machine to USB
flash drive, plug the USB flash drive into the machine’s USB
port.
a
Press when the pattern you want to save is in the
pattern editing screen or embroidery settings screen.
b
Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port on the
machine.
1 USB port
2 USB flash drive
c
Press .
Press to return to the original screen without
saving.
The “Saving...” screen is displayed. When the pattern
is saved, the display returns to the original screen
automatically.
The pattern is saved in a folder labeled “bPocket”.
Memo
If there is enough memory available after deleting
the pattern, the pattern you want to save will be
saved automatically. If there is not enough
memory available after deleting the pattern,
repeat the steps above to delete another pattern
from the machine’s memory.
It takes a few seconds to save a pattern.
See page E-34 for more information about
retrieving saved patterns.
Memo
USB flash drive is commercially available, but
some USB flash drive may not be usable with this
machine. Please visit our website for more details.
The USB flash drive can be inserted or removed
at any time except while saving or deleting a
pattern.
Note
The processing speed may vary by quantity of
data.
Do not insert anything other than USB flash drive
into the USB port. Otherwise, the USB flash drive
may be damaged.
Note
Do not insert or remove USB flash drive while
“Saving...” screen is displayed. You will lose
some or all of the pattern you are saving.
Using the Memory Function
E-34
Retrieving patterns from the machine’s
memory
a
Press .
The machine displays the patterns currently in the
memory.
b
Press the key of the pattern you want to retrieve.
Press / to move to the previous/next page.
Press to return to the original screen.
c
Press .
Pattern editing screen is displayed.
d
Adjust the pattern as desired, and then begin
embroidering.
Recalling from USB flash drive
You can recall a specific embroidery pattern from either direct
USB flash drive or a folder in the USB flash drive. If the pattern
is in a folder, check each folder to find the embroidery
pattern.
a
Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port on the
machine (see page E-33).
b
Press .
Embroidery patterns and a folder in a top folder are
displayed.
c
Select the pattern. If the stitch pattern to be retrieved
is in a folder, press the key for that folder.
Press / to move to the previous/next page.
Press to return to the original screen without
recalling.
Stitch patterns within a folder are displayed.
The folder name or the path to show the current
folder is displayed under the folder icon.
Embroidery patterns and subfolders within a folder
are displayed.
Press to return to the previous screen.
Use the computer to create folders. Folders cannot
be created with the machine.
d
Press the key of the pattern you want to retrieve.
Press / to move to the previous/next page.
Press to return to the original screen.
Memo
The selected pattern can be saved to USB flash
drive directly by pressing .
Note
The processing speed may vary by quantity of
data.
Using the Memory Function
Embroidering E-35
EMBROIDERY
E
e
Press .
Press to delete the pattern. The pattern will be
deleted from the USB flash drive.
Pattern editing screen is displayed.
f
If necessary, edit the pattern, and press .
Embroidery settings screen is displayed.
g
Press .
The embroidery screen is displayed.
Memo
The selected pattern can be saved to the
machine's memory directly by pressing .
Using the Memory Function
E-36
Appendix
This section provides important information for operating this machine. Please read this section to find
troubleshooting tips and pointers as well as how to keep your machine in the best working order.
Page number starts with “A” in this section.
Chapter1 MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING......A-2
Care and Maintenance
A-2
Restrictions on oiling
In order to prevent damaging this machine, it must not be
oiled by the user.
This machine was manufactured with the necessary amount
of oil applied to ensure correct operation, making periodic
oiling unnecessary.
If problems occur, such as difficulty turning the handwheel or
an unusual noise, immediately stop using the machine, and
contact your authorized Brother dealer or the nearest Brother
authorized service center.
Precautions on storing the machine
Do not store the machine in any of the locations described
below, otherwise damage to the machine may result, for
example, rust caused by condensation.
Exposed to extremely high temperatures
Exposed to extremely low temperatures
Exposed to extreme temperature changes
Exposed to high humidity or steam
Near a flame, heater or air conditioner
Outdoors or exposed to direct sunlight
Exposed to extremely dusty or oily environments
Cleaning the LCD Screen
If the screen is dirty, gently wipe it with a soft, dry cloth. Do
not use organic solvents or detergents.
Cleaning the machine surface
If the surface of the machine is dirty, lightly soak a cloth in
neutral detergent, squeeze it out firmly, and then wipe the
surface of the machine. After cleaning it once with a damp
cloth, wipe it again with a dry cloth.
Cleaning the race
Sewing performance will suffer if lint and dust collects in the
bobbin case, therefore, it should be cleaned regularly.
a
Press (Needle position button) to raise the needle.
b
Turn off the machine.
c
Unplug the power cord from the power supply jack on
the right side of the machine.
d
Raise the presser foot to remove the needle, presser
foot and presser foot holder.
For details, refer to “Replacing the needle” and
“Replacing the presser foot” in the “Basic operations”
section.
e
Remove the flat bed attachment or the embroidery unit
if either is attached.
f
Remove the needle plate cover.
Chapter 1
MAINTENANCE AND
TROUBLESHOOTING
Care and Maintenance
Note
In order to extend the life of this machine,
periodically turn it on and use it.
Storing this machine for an extended period of
time without using it may reduce its efficiency.
Note
Do not wipe the LCD screen with a damp cloth.
Memo
Occasionally, condensation may form on the LCD
screen or it may become fogged up; however, this
is not a malfunction. After a while, the cloudiness
will disappear.
CAUTION
Unplug the power cord before cleaning the
machine, otherwise injuries or an electric
shock may occur.
CAUTION
Unplug the power cord before cleaning the
machine, otherwise injuries or an electric
shock may occur.
Care and Maintenance
Appendix A-3
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
A
If there is a screw in the needle plate cover
1 Use the disc-shaped screwdriver to remove the screw
in the needle plate cover.
2 Grasp both sides of the needle plate cover, and then
slide it toward you.
1 Needle plate cover
If there is no screw in the needle plate cover
1 Grasp both sides of the needle plate cover, and then
slide it toward you.
1 Needle plate cover
g
Remove the bobbin case.
Grasp the bobbin case, and then pull it out.
1 Bobbin case
h
Use the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner to remove
any lint and dust from the race and bobbin thread
sensor and the surrounding area.
1 Cleaning brush
2 Race
3 Bobbin thread sensor
Do not apply oil to the bobbin case.
i
Insert the bobbin case so that the
S
mark on the
bobbin case aligns with the
z mark on the machine.
Align the S and
z marks.
1 S mark
2
z mark
3 Bobbin case
Make sure that the indicated points are aligned
before installing the bobbin case.
j
Insert the tabs on the needle plate cover into the
needle plate, and then slide the cover back on.
1 Needle plate cover
a
a
1
CAUTION
Never use a bobbin case that is scratched,
otherwise the upper thread may become
tangled, the needle may break or sewing
performance may suffer. For a new bobbin
case, contact your nearest Brother authorized
service center.
Be sure that the bobbin case is correctly
installed, otherwise the needle may break.
a
b
b
a
a
Care and Maintenance
A-4
About the maintenance message
Once this message appears, it is recommended to take your
machine to an authorized Brother dealer or nearest Brother
authorized service center for a regular maintenance check.
Although this message will disappear and the machine will
continue to function once you press , the message will
display several more times until the appropriate maintenance
is performed.
Please take the time to arrange the maintenance your machine
requires once this message appears. Such steps will help to
ensure you receive continued, uninterrupted hours of
machine operation for the future.
Touch panel is malfunctioning
If the screen does not respond correctly when you touch a key
(the machine does not perform the operation or performs a
different operation), follow the steps below to make the
proper adjustments.
a
Holding your finger on the screen, turn the main
power switch to OFF and back to ON.
The touch panel adjustment screen is displayed.
b
Lightly touch the center of each +, in order from 1 to 5.
c
Turn the main power to OFF, then turn it back to ON.
Operation beep
Each time a key is pressed you will hear one beep. If an
incorrect operation is performed you will hear two or four
beeps.
If a key is pressed (correct operation)
One beep sounds.
If an incorrect operation is performed
Two or four beeps sound.
If the machine locks up, for example, because
the thread is tangled
The machine beeps for four seconds and the machine
automatically stops.
Be sure to check for the cause of the error and correct it
before continuing to sew.
Canceling the operation beep
a
Press to display the settings screen.
b
Display page 6.
c
Set “Buzzer” to “OFF.”
Note
Do not press too hard on the screen. Otherwise,
damage may result.
Note
If you finish the screen adjustment and the
screen still does not respond, or if you cannot do
the adjustment, contact your authorized Brother
dealer.
Troubleshooting
Appendix A-5
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
A
If the machine stops operating correctly, check the
following possible problems before requesting service.
You can solve most problems by yourself. If you need
additional help, the Brother Solutions Center offers the
latest FAQs and troubleshooting tips. Visit us at “ http://
support.brother.com/ ”.
If the problem persists, contact your Brother dealer or the
nearest Brother authorized service center.
Frequent troubleshooting topics
Detailed causes and remedies for common troubleshooting
topics are described below. Be sure to refer to this before
contacting us.
Upper thread tightened up
Symptom
The upper thread appears as a single continuous line.
The lower thread is visible from the upper side of the
fabric. (Refer to the illustration below.)
The upper thread has tightened up, and comes out
when pulled.
The upper thread has tightened up, and wrinkles
appear in the fabric.
The upper thread tension is tight, and the results do
not change even after the thread tension is adjusted.
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Bobbin thread visible from right side of fabric
3 Upper thread
4 Right side of fabric
5 Bobbin thread
Cause
Incorrect bobbin threading
If the bobbin thread is incorrectly threaded, instead of the
appropriate tension being applied to the bobbin thread, it
is pulled through the fabric when the upper thread is
pulled up. For this reason, the thread is visible from the
right side of the fabric.
Remedy/check details
Correctly install the bobbin thread.
a
Press and raise the presser foot lever.
b
Remove the bobbin from the bobbin case.
c
Place the bobbin in the bobbin case so that the thread
unwinds in the correct direction.
Hold the bobbin with your right hand with the thread
unwinding to the left, and hold the end of the thread
with your left hand.
Then, with your right hand, place the bobbin in the
bobbin case.
If the bobbin is inserted with the thread unwinding in
the wrong direction, sewing will be done with an
incorrect thread tension.
d
While holding the bobbin in place with your finger,
pass the thread through the slit in the needle plate
cover.
Hold down the bobbin with your right hand, and
then pull the end of the thread around the tab with
your left hand.
1 Tab
2 Hold down the bobbin with your right hand.
Troubleshooting
Upper thread tightened up page A-5
Tangled thread on wrong side of fabric page A-6
Incorrect thread tension page A-7
Fabric is caught in the machine and cannot
be removed
page A-8
If the thread becomes tangled under the
bobbin winder seat
page A-11
Troubleshooting
A-6
Pull the thread to pass it through the slit in the needle
plate cover, then cut it with the cutter.
3 Slit
4 Cutter
Sewing with the correct thread tension is possible after
the bobbin has been correctly installed in the bobbin
case.
e
Press to unlock all keys and buttons.
Tangled thread on wrong side of fabric
Symptom
The thread becomes tangled on the wrong side of the
fabric.
After starting sewing, a rattling noise is made and
sewing cannot continue.
Looking under the fabric, there is tangled thread in
the bobbin case.
Cause
Incorrect upper threading
If the upper thread is incorrectly threaded, the upper
thread passed through the fabric cannot be firmly pulled
up and the upper thread becomes tangled in the bobbin
case, causing a rattling noise.
Remedy/check details
Remove the tangled thread, and then correct the upper
threading.
a
Remove the tangled thread. If it cannot be removed,
cut the thread with scissors.
For details, refer to “Cleaning the race” on page A-2.
b
Remove the upper thread from the machine.
If the bobbin was removed from the bobbin case,
refer to “Installing the bobbin” in the “Basic
operations” section and “Remedy/check details” in
the section “Upper thread tightened up” on page A-5
to correctly install the bobbin.
c
Refer to the following steps to correct the upper
threading. Raise the presser foot using the presser foot
lever.
1 Presser foot lever
The upper thread shutter opens so the machine can
be threaded.
If the presser foot is not raised, the machine cannot
be threaded correctly.
d
Press (Needle position button) once or twice to
raise the needle.
The needle is correctly raised when the mark on the
handwheel is at the top, as shown below. Check the
handwheel and, if this mark is not at this position,
press (Needle position button) until it is.
1 Mark on handwheel
e
While holding the thread lightly with your right hand,
pull the thread with your left hand, and then pass the
thread behind the thread guide cover and to the front.
1 Thread guide cover
1
1
1
Troubleshooting
Appendix A-7
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
A
f
While holding the thread lightly with your right hand,
pass the thread under the thread guide plate, and then
pull it up.
1 Thread guide plate
g
Pass the thread through the thread channel in the order
shown below.
1 Shutter
h
Press .
i
Slide the thread behind the needle bar thread guide.
The thread can easily be passed behind the needle bar
thread guide by holding the thread in your left hand,
then feeding the thread with your right hand, as shown.
Make sure that the thread is passed through to the left of
the tab of the needle bar thread guide.
1 Needle bar thread guide
2 Tab
j
Next, use the needle threader to thread the needle.
Continue with the procedure in “Threading the
needle” in the “Basic operations” section.
Incorrect thread tension
Symptoms
Symptom 1: The bobbin thread is visible from the
right side of the fabric. (Refer to illustration below)
Symptom 2: The upper thread appears as a straight
line on the right side of the fabric.
Symptom 3: The upper thread is visible from the
wrong side of the fabric. (Refer to illustration below)
Symptom 4: The bobbin thread appears as a straight
line on the wrong side of the fabric.
Symptom 5: The stitching on the wrong side of the
fabric is loose or has slack.
Symptom 1
Symptom 3
1 Wrong side of fabric
2 Bobbin thread visible from right side of fabric
3 Upper thread
4 Right side of fabric
5 Bobbin thread
6 Upper thread visible from wrong side of fabric
Cause/remedy/check details
Cause 1
The machine is not correctly threaded.
<With symptoms 1 and 2 described above>
The bobbin threading is incorrect.
Return the upper thread tension to the standard setting,
and then refer to “Upper thread tightened up” on page A-5
to correct the threading.
<With symptoms 3 and 5 described above>
The upper threading is incorrect.
Return the upper thread tension to the standard setting,
and then refer to “Tangled thread on wrong side of fabric”
on page A-6 to correct the upper threading.
1
1
2
Troubleshooting
A-8
Cause 2
A needle and thread appropriate for the fabric are not
being used.
The machine needle that should be used depends on the
type of fabric sewn and the thread thickness.
If a needle and thread appropriate for the fabric are not
being used, the thread tension will not be adjusted
correctly, causing wrinkles in the fabric or skipped
stitches.
Refer to “Fabric/Thread/Needle Combinations” in the
“Basic operations” section to check that a needle and
thread appropriate for the fabric are being used.
Cause 3
An appropriate upper tension is not selected.
The setting selected for the upper thread tension is not
appropriate.
Refer to “Setting the thread tension” in the “Basic
operations” section to select an appropriate thread
tension.
The appropriate thread tension differs depending on the
type of fabric and thread being used.
* Adjust the thread tension while test sewing on a
piece of scrap fabric that is the same as that used in
your project.
If the bobbin thread is visible from the right side of
the fabric
Press in the manual adjustment screen to
decrease the tension of the upper thread.
If the upper thread is visible from the wrong side of
the fabric
Press in the manual adjustment screen to
increase the tension of the upper thread.
Fabric is caught in the machine and cannot
be removed
If the fabric is caught in the machine and cannot be removed,
the thread may have become tangled under the needle plate.
Follow the procedure described below to remove the fabric
from the machine. If the operation cannot be completed
according to this procedure, instead of attempting to remove it
forcefully, contact your nearest Brother authorized service
center.
Removing the fabric from the machine
a
Immediately stop the machine.
b
Turn off the machine.
c
Remove the needle.
If the needle is lowered into the fabric, turn the
handwheel away from you (clockwise) to raise the
needle out of the fabric, and then remove the needle.
Refer to “Replacing the needle” in the “Basic
operations” section.
d
Remove the presser foot and presser foot holder.
Refer to “Replacing the presser foot” and “Removing
and attaching the presser foot holder” in the “Basic
operations” section.
e
Lift up the fabric and cut the threads below it.
If the fabric can be removed, remove it. Continue with
the following steps to clean the race.
f
Remove the needle plate cover.
1 Needle plate cover
Refer to “Cleaning the race” on page A-2.
g
Cut out the tangled threads, and then remove the
bobbin.
Note
If the upper threading and bobbin threading are
incorrect, the thread tension cannot be adjusted
correctly. Check the upper threading and bobbin
threading first, and then adjust the thread
tension.
1
Troubleshooting
Appendix A-9
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
A
h
Remove the bobbin case.
If threads remain in the bobbin case, remove them.
1 Bobbin case
i
Use the cleaning brush or a vacuum cleaner mini
attachment to remove any lint or dust from the race
and its surrounding area.
1 Cleaning brush
2 Race
j
Use the included disc-shaped screwdriver to loosen the
two screws on the needle plate.
k
Slightly lift up the needle plate, cut any tangled
threads, and then remove the needle plate.
Remove the fabric and threads from the needle plate.
If the fabric cannot be removed, even after completing
these steps, contact your nearest Brother authorized
service center.
l
Remove any threads in the race and around the feed
dogs.
m
Turn the handwheel to raise the feed dogs.
n
Align the two screw holes in the needle plate with the
two holes at the needle plate mounting base, and then
fit the needle plate onto the machine.
o
Lightly finger-tighten the screw on the right side of the
needle plate. Then, use the disc-shaped screwdriver to
firmly tighten the screw on the left side. Finally, firmly
tighten the screw on the right side.
Turn the handwheel to check that the feed dogs move
smoothly and do not contact the edges of the slots in the
needle plate.
1 Correct position of feed dogs
2 Incorrect position of feed dogs
If the fabric could be removed. Continue with step p.
If the fabric could not be removed. Continue with step j.
Note
Compressed can air is not recommended to be
used.
Note
Be careful not to drop the removed screws in the
machine.
Note
Be careful not to drop the removed screws in the
machine.
Troubleshooting
A-10
p
Insert the bobbin case so that the S mark on the
bobbin case aligns with the
z mark on the machine.
Align the S and
z marks.
1 S mark
2
z mark
3 Bobbin case
Make sure that the indicated points are aligned
before installing the bobbin case.
q
Attach the needle plate cover according to step j in
“Cleaning the race” on page A-2.
r
Check the condition of the needle, and then install it.
If the needle is in a poor condition, for example, if it is
bent, be sure to install a new needle.
Refer to “Checking the needle” and “Replacing the
needle” in the “Basic operations” section.
Checking machine operations
If the needle plate has been removed, check machine
operations to confirm that installation has been completed
correctly.
a
Turn on the machine.
b
Select stitch .
c
Slowly turn the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise), and look from all sides to check
that the needle falls at the center of the opening in the
needle plate.
If the needle contacts the needle plate, remove the
needle plate, and then install it again, starting with step
m in “Removing the fabric from the machine” on
page A-8.
1 Opening in the needle plate
2 Handwheel
d
Select stitch . At this time, increase the stitch length
and width to their maximum settings.
For details on changing the settings, refer to “Setting
the stitch width” and “Setting the stitch length” in the
“Basic operations” section.
e
Slowly turn the handwheel toward you
(counterclockwise) and check that the needle bar and
feed dogs operate correctly.
If the needle or feed dogs contact the needle plate, the
machine may be malfunctioning; therefore, contact
your nearest Brother authorized service center.
CAUTION
Never use a bobbin case that is scratched,
otherwise the upper thread may become
tangled, the needle may break or sewing
performance may suffer.
Make sure that you fit the bobbin case
properly, otherwise the needle may break.
CAUTION
Never use bent needles. Bent needles can
easily break, possibly resulting in injuries.
a
b
b
a
Note
After completing this procedure, continue with
the following procedure in “Checking machine
operations” to check that the machine is
operating correctly.
Memo
Since the needle may have been damaged when
the fabric was caught in the machine, we
recommend replacing it with a new one.
Note
Do not yet install the presser foot and thread.
Troubleshooting
Appendix A-11
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
A
f
Turn off the machine, and then install the bobbin and
presser foot.
Refer to “Installing the bobbin” and “Replacing the
presser foot” in the “Basic operations” section.
g
Correctly thread the machine.
For details on threading the machine, refer to “Upper
Threading” in the “Basic operations” section.
h
Perform trial sewing with cotton fabric.
If the thread becomes tangled under the
bobbin winder seat
If the bobbin winding starts when the thread is not passed
under the pretension disk of the bobbin-winding thread guide
correctly, the thread may become tangled under the bobbin
winder seat.
In such a case, wind off the thread according to the following
procedure.
1 Thread
2 Bobbin winder seat
a
If the thread become tangled under the bobbin winder
seat, press the “Start/Stop” button once to stop the
bobbin winding.
When the foot controller is plugged in, remove your
foot from the foot controller.
b
Cut the thread with scissors beside the bobbin-winding
thread guide.
1 Bobbin-winding thread guide
c
Slide the bobbin winder shaft to the left, and then
remove the bobbin from the shaft and cut the thread
leading to the bobbin in order to be able to completely
remove the bobbin from shaft.
Memo
The thread may have become tangled as a result
of incorrect upper threading. Make sure that the
machine is correctly threaded.
Note
Incorrect sewing may be the result of incorrect
upper threading or sewing thin fabrics. If there
are poor results from the trial sewing, check the
upper threading or the type of fabric being used.
1
2
CAUTION
Do not remove the bobbin winder seat even if
the thread become tangled under the bobbin
winder seat. It may result in injuries.
Do not remove the screw on the bobbin
winder guide post, otherwise the machine may
be damaged; you cannot wind off the thread
by removing the screw.
1 Screw of the bobbin winder guide post
1
1
Troubleshooting
A-12
d
Hold the thread end with your left hand, and wind off
the thread clockwise with your right hand as shown
below.
e
Wind the bobbin again.
Note
Make sure that the thread passes under the
pretension disk of the bobbin-winding thread
guide correctly.
Troubleshooting
Appendix A-13
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
A
List of symptoms
Getting ready
Symptom Probable Cause Remedy Reference
Cannot thread the
needle.
Needle is not in the correct position. Press the “Needle position” button to raise the
needle.
B-4
Needle is installed incorrectly. Reinstall the needle correctly. B-31
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. B-31
Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine and
rethread the machine.
B-23
The needle threader hook is bent and does not
pass through the eye of the needle.
Contact your authorized Brother dealer or the
nearest Brother authorized service center.
The needle threader lever cannot be moved or
returned to its original position.
Contact your authorized Brother dealer or the
nearest Brother authorized service center.
A size 65/9 needle is being used. The needle is incompatible with the needle
threader. Manually pass the thread through the
eye of the needle.
B-26
Bobbin thread
does not wind
neatly on the
bobbin.
The thread is not passed through the bobbin
winding thread guide correctly.
Correctly pass the thread through the bobbin
winding thread guide.
B-17
Bobbin spins slowly. Move the sewing speed controller to the right
so that the speed will be increased.
B-17
The thread that was pulled out was not wound
onto the bobbin correctly.
Wind the thread that was pulled off around the
bobbin 5 or 6 times clockwise.
B-17
The empty bobbin was not set on the pin
properly.
Set the empty bobbin on the pin and slowly turn
the bobbin until you hear it click in place.
B-17
While winding the
bobbin, the bobbin
thread was wound
below the bobbin
winder seat.
You have not wound the bobbin thread properly.
While initially winding thread on the bobbin the
bobbin thread is not properly inserted into the
guides.
After removing the thread wound below the
bobbin winder seat, wind the bobbin correctly.
Follow the drawn images on the top of the
machine for guidance when threading the
machine for bobbin winding.
B-17, A-11
The bobbin thread
cannot be pulled
up.
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. B-31
Bobbin is set incorrectly. Reset the bobbin correctly. B-20
Nothing appears in
the LCD.
Main power switch is not turned on. Turn the main power to ON. B-10
The plug of the power cord is not inserted into
an electrical outlet.
Insert the plug of the power cord into an
electrical outlet.
B-10
The LCD screen is
fogged up.
Condensation has formed on the LCD screen. After a while, the cloudiness will disappear.
The operation keys
do not respond.
A glove is worn when the keys are pressed.
The keys are pressed with a fingernail.
A non-electrostatic touch pen is being used.
Directly touch the operation keys with your
finger.
When using a commercially available touch pen,
make sure that it is compatible with capacitive
sensing.
B-5
The operation keys
do not respond, or
the sensitivity is
too strong.
The sensitivity of the operation keys is not set
for the user.
Adjust the sensitivity of the operation keys. B-15
The sewing light
does not come on.
The sewing light is damaged. Contact your authorized Brother dealer or the
nearest Brother authorized service center.
“Light” is set to “OFF” in the settings screen. Change the setting to “ON. B-14
Troubleshooting
A-14
While sewing
Embroidery unit
does not operate.
Embroidery unit is not attached correctly. Reattach the embroidery unit correctly. B-54
Embroidery frame was attached before the unit
was initialized.
Remove the embroidery frame, and then
perform the initialization process correctly.
B-55
Symptom Probable Cause Remedy Reference
Machine does not
operate.
“Start/Stop” button was not pressed. Press the “Start/Stop” button. B-36
The bobbin winder shaft is pushed to the right. Move the bobbin winder shaft to the left. B-17
There is no pattern selected. Select a pattern. B-36
Presser foot is not lowered. Lower the presser foot. B-2
“Start/Stop” button was pressed with the foot
controller attached.
Remove the foot controller, or use the foot
controller to operate the machine.
B-38
The “Start/Stop” button was pressed while the
machine is set for the sewing speed controller
to control the zigzag stitch width.
Use the foot controller instead of the “Start/
Stop” button to operate the machine, or set the
“Width Control” to “OFF” in the settings screen.
B-13, B-38
Symptom Probable Cause Remedy Reference
Troubleshooting
Appendix A-15
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
A
Needle breaks.
Needle is installed incorrectly. Reinstall the needle correctly. B-31
Needle clamp screw is not tightened. Tighten the needle clamp screw. B-31
Needle is turned or bent. Replace the needle. B-31
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combinations”chart.
B-30
Wrong presser foot was used. Use the recommended presser foot. B-34
Upper thread tension is too tight. Adjust the thread tension. B-42
Fabric is pulled during sewing. Do not pull the fabric during sewing.
Spool cap is set incorrectly. Check the method for attaching the spool cap,
then reattach the spool cap.
B-17
There are scratches around the opening in the
needle plate.
* There is a notch on the left side of the
opening in the needle plate. This is not a
scratch.
1 Notch
Replace the needle plate, or consult your
authorized Brother dealer.
A-8
There are scratches around the opening in the
presser foot.
Replace the presser foot, or consult your
authorized Brother dealer.
B-33
There are scratches on the bobbin case. Replace the bobbin case, or consult your
authorized Brother dealer.
A-2
Needle is defective. Replace the needle. B-31
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine
is not used.
Incorrect bobbins will not work properly. Only
use a bobbin designed specifically for this
machine.
B-17
Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine and
rethread the machine.
B-23
Bobbin is set incorrectly. Reset the bobbin correctly. B-20
Presser foot is attached incorrectly. Attach the presser foot correctly. B-33
Screw of the presser foot holder is loose. Securely tighten the screw of the presser foot. B-34
Needle breaks.
Fabric is too thick. Use fabric that the needle can pierce when the
handwheel is turned.
B-30, S-4
Fabric is fed forcefully when sewing thick fabric
or thick seams.
Allow the fabric to be fed without being
forcefully pushed.
S-4
Stitch length is too short. Adjust the stitch length. B-41
Stabilizer is not attached to fabric being
embroidered.
Attach stabilizer. B-58
Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound. Use a correctly wound bobbin. B-57
Symptom Probable Cause Remedy Reference
a
Troubleshooting
A-16
Upper thread
breaks.
Machine is not threaded correctly (used the
wrong spool cap, spool cap is loose, the thread
did not catch the needle bar threader, etc.).
Rethread the machine correctly. B-23
Knotted or tangled thread is being used. Remove any knots or tangles.
The selected needle is not appropriate for the
thread being used.
Select a needle that is appropriate for the type
of thread being used.
B-30
Upper thread tension is too tight. Adjust the thread tension. B-42
Thread is tangled. Use scissors, etc., to cut the tangled thread and
remove it from the race, etc.
A-6
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. B-31
Needle is installed incorrectly. Reinstall the needle correctly. B-31
There are scratches around the opening of the
needle plate.
* There is a notch on the left side of the
opening in the needle plate. This is not a
scratch.
1 Notch
Replace the needle plate, or consult your
authorized Brother dealer.
A-8
There are scratches around the opening in the
presser foot.
Replace the presser foot, or consult your
authorized Brother dealer.
B-33
There are scratches on the bobbin case. Replace the bobbin case, or consult your
authorized Brother dealer.
A-2
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combinations” chart.
B-30
While sewing, the thread became knotted or
tangled.
Rethread upper and lower thread. B-20, B-23
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine
is not used.
Incorrect bobbins will not work properly. Only
use a bobbin designed specifically for this
machine.
B-17
The thread is
tangled on the
wrong side of the
fabric.
Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine and
rethread the machine. Be sure that the presser
foot is in the raised position when threading the
machine so that the upper thread sets properly
in the upper tension.
B-23, A-6
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combinations” chart.
B-30
The upper thread is
too tight.
The bobbin thread is incorrectly installed. Correctly install the bobbin thread. B-20, A-5
Bobbin thread
breaks.
Bobbin is set incorrectly. Reset the bobbin correctly. B-20
Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound. Use a correctly wound bobbin. B-17
There are scratches on the bobbin or it doesn’t
rotate properly.
Replace the bobbin. B-20
Thread is tangled. Use scissors, etc. to cut the tangled thread and
remove it from the race, etc.
A-8
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine
is not used.
Incorrect bobbins will not work properly. Only
use a bobbin designed specifically for this
machine.
B-17
Symptom Probable Cause Remedy Reference
a
Troubleshooting
Appendix A-17
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
A
Fabric puckers.
There is a mistake in the upper or bobbin
threading.
Check the steps for threading the machine and
rethread it correctly.
B-23
Spool cap is set incorrectly. Check the method for attaching the spool cap,
then reattach the spool cap.
B-23
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combinations” chart.
B-30
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. B-31
Stitches are too long when sewing thin fabrics. Shorten the stitch length. B-41
Thread tension is set incorrectly. Adjust the thread tension. B-42
Wrong presser foot. Use the correct presser foot. B-34
The stitch is not
sewn correctly.
The presser foot that is used is not appropriate
for the type of stitch that you wish to sew.
Attach the presser foot that is appropriate for
the type of stitch that you wish to sew.
B-34
The thread tension is incorrect. Adjust the tension of the upper thread. B-42, A-7
The thread is tangled, for example, in the
bobbin case.
Remove the tangle thread. If the thread is
tangled in the bobbin case, clean the race.
A-8
Feed dogs are set in the down position.
Slide the feed dog position switch to the right
().
B-2
Skipped stitches
Machine is threaded incorrectly. Check the steps for threading the machine and
rethread it correctly.
B-23
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combinations” chart.
B-30
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. B-31
Needle is installed incorrectly. Reinstall the needle correctly. B-31
Needle is defective. Replace the needle. B-31
Dust or lint has collected under the needle
plate.
Remove the dust or lint with the brush. A-2
Thin or stretch fabrics are being sewn. Sew with one sheet of thin paper under the
fabric.
S-5, D-4
No stitching
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. B-31
Bobbin is set incorrectly. Reset the bobbin correctly. B-20
Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine and
rethread the machine.
B-23
High-pitched
sound while
sewing
Dust or lint is caught in the feed dogs. Remove the dust or lint. A-2
Pieces of thread are caught in the race. Clean the race. A-2
Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine and
rethread the machine.
B-23
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine
is not used.
Incorrect bobbins will not work properly. Only
use a bobbin designed specifically for this
machine.
B-17
There are needle holes or friction scratches in
the bobbin case.
Replace the bobbin case, or consult your
authorized Brother dealer.
A-2
Fabric does not
feed through the
machine.
Feed dogs are set in the down position. Slide the feed dog position switch to the right
().
B-2
Stitches are too close together. Lengthen the stitch length setting. B-41
Wrong presser foot was used. Use the correct presser foot. B-34
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. B-31
Symptom Probable Cause Remedy Reference
Troubleshooting
A-18
After sewing
Fabric does not
feed through the
machine.
Thread is entangled. Cut the entangled thread and remove it from the
race.
A-8
Zigzag footJ” is slanted on a thick seam at the
beginning of stitching.
Use the presser foot locking pin (black button
on the left side) on zigzag foot “J” to keep the
presser foot level while sewing.
S-4
Presser foot pressure is set incorrectly for
fabric.
Adjust presser foot pressure within the settings
screen.
B-45
The fabric feeds in
the opposite
direction.
The feed mechanism is damaged. Contact your authorized Brother dealer or the
nearest Brother authorized service center.
The needle
contacts the
needle plate.
The needle clamp screw is loose. Firmly tighten the needle clamp screw. If the
needle is bent or blunt, replace it with a new
one.
B-31
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. B-31
Fabric being sewn
with the machine
cannot be
removed.
Thread is tangled below the needle plate. Lift up the fabric and cut the threads below it,
and clean the race.
A-8
A broken needle
has fallen into the
machine.
- Turn off the machine, and remove the needle
plate. If the needle that fell into the machine can
be seen, use tweezers to remove it. After
removing the needle, return the needle plate to
its original position and insert a new needle.
Before turning on the machine, slowly turn the
handwheel toward you to check that it turns
smoothly and that the new needle enters
through the center of the needle plate opening.
If the handwheel does not turn smoothly or the
needle that fell into the machine cannot be
removed, consult your authorized Brother
dealer or the nearest Brother authorized service
center.
A-8
The handwheel
feels sluggish
when it is turned.
Thread is tangled in the bobbin case. Remove the tangled thread from the bobbin
case. Re-install the bobbin case so it is
correctly positioned.
A-6, A-8
Symptom Probable Cause Remedy Reference
Thread tension is
incorrect.
Upper threading is incorrect. Check the steps for threading the machine and
rethread the machine.
B-23
Bobbin is set incorrectly. Reset the bobbin. (If needle plate was removed,
reinstall needle plate and tighten screws prior to
installing bobbin case. Check to make sure
needle enter through the center of needle plate
opening.)
B-20, A-2
Using improper needle or thread for the
selected fabric.
Check the “Fabric/Thread/Needle
Combinations” chart.
B-30
Presser foot holder is not attached correctly. Reattach the presser foot holder correctly. B-33
Thread tension is set incorrectly. Adjust the thread tension. B-42
Bobbin thread is incorrectly wound. Use a correctly wound bobbin. B-20
Needle is turned, bent or the point is dull. Replace the needle. B-31
A bobbin designed specifically for this machine
is not used.
Incorrect bobbins will not work properly. Only
use a bobbin designed specifically for this
machine.
B-17
Symptom Probable Cause Remedy Reference
Troubleshooting
Appendix A-19
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
A
Character or
decorative patterns
are misaligned.
Pattern adjustment settings were set incorrectly. Revise the pattern adjustment settings. D-5
Pattern does not
turn out.
Wrong presser foot was used. Attach the correct presser foot. B-34
Did not use a stabilizer material on thin fabrics
or stretch fabrics.
Attach a stabilizer material. D-4
Thread tension is set incorrectly. Adjust the thread tension. B-42
Fabric was pulled, pushed or fed at an angle
while it was being sewn.
Sew while guiding the fabric with your hands so
that the fabric is fed in a straight line.
B-36
The thread is tangled, for example, in the
bobbin case.
Remove the tangle thread. If the thread is
tangled in the bobbin case, clean the race.
A-2
Embroidery pattern
does not sew out
correctly.
Thread is twisted. Use scissors, etc., to cut the twisted thread and
remove it from the bobbin case, etc.
A-8
Thread tension is set incorrectly. Adjust the thread tension. B-42
Fabric was not inserted into the frame correctly
(fabric was loose, etc.).
If the fabric is not taut in the frame, the pattern
may turn out poorly or there may be shrinkage
of the pattern. Set the fabric into the frame
correctly.
B-58
Stabilizing material was not attached. Always use stabilizing material, especially with
stretch fabrics, lightweight fabrics, fabrics with
a coarse weave, or fabrics that often cause
pattern shrinkage. See your authorized Brother
dealer for the proper stabilizer.
B-58
There was an object placed near the machine,
and the carriage or embroidery frame hit the
object during sewing.
If the frame bumps something during sewing,
the pattern will turn out poorly. Do not place
anything in the area where the frame may bump
it during sewing.
B-57
Fabric outside the frame edges interferes with
the sewing arm, so the embroidery unit cannot
move.
Reinsert the fabric in the embroidery frame so
that the excess fabric is away from the sewing
arm, and rotate the pattern 180 degrees.
B-58
Fabric is too heavy, so the embroidery unit
cannot move freely.
Place a large thick book or similar object under
the arm head to lightly lift the heavy side and
keep it level.
Embroidery pattern
does not sew out
correctly.
Fabric is hanging off the table. If the fabric is hanging off the table during
embroidery, the embroidery unit will not move
freely. Place the fabric so that it does not hang
off the table or hold the fabric to keep it from
dragging.
B-57
Fabric is snagged or caught on something. Stop the machine and place the fabric so that it
does not get caught or snagged.
Embroidery frame was removed during sewing
(for example, to reset the bobbin). The presser
foot was bumped or moved while removing or
attaching the embroidery frame, or the
embroidery unit was moved.
If the presser foot is bumped or the embroidery
unit is moved during sewing, the pattern will not
turn out. Be careful when removing or
reattaching the embroidery frame during
sewing.
B-62
Stabilizer is incorrectly attached, for example, it
is smaller than the embroidery frame.
Attach the stabilizer correctly. B-58
Loops appear on
the surface of the
fabric when
embroidering.
The thread tension is incorrectly set. Adjust the thread tension. E-26
The combination of the bobbin case and bobbin
thread is incorrect.
Change the bobbin case or bobbin thread so
that the correct combination is used.
B-57
Symptom Probable Cause Remedy Reference
Troubleshooting
A-20
Error messages
When erroneous operations are performed messages and advice on operation will be displayed on the LCD. Follow what is
displayed. If you press or do the operation correctly while the error message is displayed, the message disappears.
Error messages Cause/solution
1
A malfunction occurred. Turn the machine off, then
on again.
This message is displayed if some malfunction occurs.
Turn the machine off, then back on again.
If this message continues to appear, the machine may be malfunctioning.
Please contact your authorized Brother dealer or the nearest Brother
authorized service center.
2
Cannot change the configuration of the characters. This message is displayed when there are too many characters and the
curved character configuration is impossible.
3
Cannot change the font since some letters are not
included to the selected font.
This message appears when the font of the embroidery character pattern is
changed to one that does not include characters used in the pattern.
4
Cannot recognize the data for the selected pattern.
The data may be corrupted. Please turn off the
power and turn on again.
This message appears when you try to retrieve pattern data that is invalid.
Since any of the following may be the cause, check the pattern data.
The pattern data is damaged.
The data that you tried to retrieve was created using another
manufacturer’s data design system.
Turn the machine off, then on again to return it to its normal condition.
5
Check and rethread the upper thread. This message is displayed when the upper thread is broken or not threaded
correctly, and the “Start/Stop” button, etc. is pressed.
6
Data volume is too large for this pattern. This message is displayed when the patterns you are editing take up too
much memory, or if you are editing too many patterns for the memory.
7
Lower the buttonhole lever. This message is displayed when the buttonhole lever is up, a buttonhole
stitch is selected, and the “Start/Stop” button, etc. is pressed.
8
Lower the presser foot lever. This message is displayed when a button, such as the “Start/Stop” button,
was pressed while the presser foot was raised.
9
No more patterns can be added to this
combination.
This message is displayed when you tried to combine more than 70
decorative stitches.
10
Not enough available memory to save. This message is displayed when the memory is full and the stitch or pattern
cannot be saved.
11
Not enough available memory to save the pattern.
Delete another pattern?
This message is displayed when the memory is full and the stitch or pattern
cannot be saved.
12
OK to recall and resume previous memory? This message appears if the machine is turned off while embroidering, then
turned on again.
Press to return the machine to the condition (pattern position and
number of stitches) when it was turned off. Follow the procedure described
in “If the thread breaks during sewing” on page E-24 to align the needle
position and embroider the remainder of the pattern.
13
Pattern extends to the outside of embroidery frame. This message is displayed when the combined character pattern is too large
for the embroidery frame. You can rotate the pattern 90 degrees and
continue combining characters.
14
Pattern extends to the outside of embroidery frame.
Add no additional characters.
This message is displayed when the character pattern combination is too
large to fit in the embroidery frame. Change the character pattern size or
layout the patterns to fit the embroidery frame. If “Embroidery Frame
Identification View” is set to “ON”, setting to “OFF” or selecting larger frame
may help.
15
Pattern extends to the outside of embroidery frame.
This function cannot be used at this time.
This message appears when the embroidery character pattern is resized or
switched between written vertically/horizontally so that it is too large for the
embroidery frame.
16
Preventive maintenance is recommended. This message is displayed when the machine needs to be maintained. (page
A-3)
17
Raise the buttonhole lever. This message is displayed when the buttonhole lever is down, a stitch other
than a buttonhole is selected, and the “Start/Stop” button, etc. is pressed.
Troubleshooting
Appendix A-21
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
A
18
Selected pattern field extends to the outside of the
embroidery frame.
This message appears when the selected embroidery pattern is larger than
the large embroidery frame. Reduce the pattern size, or select a different
pattern.
This message appears when the selected embroidery pattern is larger than
the embroidery frame selected when “Embroidery Frame Identification View”
is set to “ON”.
19
The bobbin thread is almost empty. This message is displayed when the bobbin thread is running out. Follow the
procedure described in “If the bobbin runs out of thread” on page E-23.
20
The bobbin winder safety device has activated. Is
the thread tangled?
This message is displayed when the bobbin is being wound, and the motor
locks because the thread is tangled, etc.
21
The carriage of the embroidery unit will
move. Keep your hands etc. away from the
carriage.
This message appears before embroidery unit moves.
22
The pockets are full. Delete a pattern. This message is displayed when the memory is full and a pattern must be
deleted.
23
The safety device has been activated. Is the
thread tangled? Is the needle bent?
This message is displayed when the motor locks due to tangled thread or for
other reasons related to thread delivery.
24
The "Start/Stop" button does not operate with the
foot controller attached. Remove the foot controller.
This message is displayed when the “Start/Stop” button is pressed to sew
Utility stitches or Character/Decorative stitches while the foot controller is
connected.
25
There is a pattern included that cannot be saved to
USB media. Save the pattern in the machine's
memory.
Depending on the pattern, it may not be possible to save it to a USB flash
drive.
26
This pattern cannot be used. This message appears when you try to retrieve a pattern that cannot be used
with this machine.
27 This USB media cannot be used. This message is displayed when you try to use incompatible media.
28
Turn off the power and replace the needle
plate.
This message is displayed when you try to sew with a stitch other than a
straight stitch (middle needle position) while the straight stitch needle plate is
installed.
This message is also displayed when the needle plate is removed while the
machine is still turned on.
29 USB media error This message is displayed when an error occurs with the USB flash drive.
30
USB media is not loaded. Load USB media. This message is displayed when you try to recall or save a pattern while no
USB flash drive is loaded.
31
When the speed controller is set to control the
zigzag stitch width, the "Start/Stop" button does
not operate.
This message is displayed when the speed control lever is set to control the
zigzag stitch width, and the “Start/Stop” button is pressed. Set “Width
Control” to “OFF” in the settings screen (page B-13), or use the foot
controller to operate the machine.
32
F**
If error message “F**” appears in the LCD while the sewing machine is being
used, the machine may be malfunctioning. Contact your authorized Brother
dealer or the nearest Brother authorized service center.
Error messages Cause/solution
Upgrading your machine’s software using USB flash drive
A-22
You can use USB flash drive to upgrade software for your
sewing machine.
When an upgrade program is available on our website at
“ http://support.brother.com/
”, please download the file(s)
following the instructions on the website and steps listed
below.
a
Turn on the machine while pressing and holding
(Needle position button).
The following screen appears.
b
Insert the USB flash drive into the USB port on the
machine. The media device should only contain the
upgrade file.
1 USB port
2 USB flash drive
c
Press .
The following screen appears.
d
When the following screen appears, upgrading is
completed.
e
Remove the USB flash drive, and turn the machine off
and on again.
Upgrading your machine’s software using USB flash drive
Note
When using USB flash drive to upgrade the
software, check that no data other than the
upgrade file is saved on the USB flash drive
being used before starting to upgrade.
Upgrade file can be recalled from a USB flash
drive of any size.
Note
When using USB flash drive equipped with an
access indicator, the access indicator will begin
flashing after the media is inserted into your
machine, and may take about 5 to 6 seconds
before the media is recognized. (The length of
time varies depending on the USB flash drive.)
Note
If an error occurred, a text error message will
appear. At this time, turn the machine off, and then
start the procedure again from step
a.
Index
Appendix A-23
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
A
Numerics
1/4" quilting foot ....................................................................... S-29
1/4" quilting foot with guide
..................................................... S-29
7 mm satin stitches
.................................................................... D-2
A
Accessories
included accessories
............................................................... B-6
optional accessories
................................................................ B-7
Accessory compartment
............................................................. B-5
Adjustable zipper/piping foot
.................................................... S-24
Adjusting stitch length
.............................................................. B-41
Adjusting stitch width
............................................................... B-41
Adjusting thread tension
........................................................... B-42
Air vent
...................................................................................... B-3
Aligning the position
................................................................ E-15
Alphabet characters
character/decorative stitches
.................................................. D-2
embroidery edit
...................................................................... E-2
Appliqué
.................................................................................. S-27
using an embroidery frame pattern
....................................... E-18
using frame pattern to make appliqué
................................... E-20
Array key
.................................................................................. E-12
Arrow keys
........................................................... D-21, E-6, E-13
Attaching presser foot holder
.................................................... B-34
Automatic reinforcement stitch key
.......................................... B-39
Automatic thread cutting
.......................................................... B-44
B
Back key ..................................................................................... B-5
Back to beginning key
............................................................... D-9
Ball point needle
...................................................................... B-30
Bar tack stitch
........................................................................... S-33
Basic sewing
............................................................................. B-36
Basic stitching
............................................................................ S-7
Basting stitch
.............................................................................. S-7
Beep
........................................................................................... A-4
Blind hem stitch
......................................................................... S-9
Block move key
....................................................................... D-22
Bobbin
runs out of thread
................................................................. E-23
Bobbin case
..................................................................... B-3, B-57
Bobbin case removal
.................................................................. A-2
Bobbin cover
.............................................................................. B-3
Bobbin installation
................................................................... B-20
Bobbin thread
pulling up
............................................................................. B-27
winding
................................................................................ B-17
Bobbin winder
............................................................................ B-2
Bobbin winding
........................................................................ B-17
Bobbin winding thread guide
.......................................... B-2, B-17
“bPocket” folder
..................................... B-16, D-15, D-23, E-33
Button guide plate
.................................................................... S-16
Button sewing
........................................................................... S-18
Buttonhole lever
.............................................................. B-3, S-17
Buttonhole sewing
.................................................................... S-15
Buttonhole stitching
.................................................................. S-15
Buzzer
........................................................................................ A-4
C
Care ........................................................................................... A-2
Changing sewing direction
......................................................... S-2
Character spacing key
.............................................................. E-10
Character stitches
...................................................................... D-2
Character/decorative stitches
adjustments
........................................................................... D-5
combining
............................................................................ D-11
editing
.................................................................................... D-7
retrieving
.............................................................................. D-16
saving
...................................................................... D-14, D-15
selecting
................................................................................. D-2
sewing
................................................................................... D-4
Checking needle
...................................................................... B-31
Cleaning
LCD screen
............................................................................ A-2
machine surface
..................................................................... A-2
race
........................................................................................ A-2
Combining patterns
character/decorative stitches
................................................ D-11
embroidery patterns
.............................................................. E-13
Concealed seams
...................................................................... S-20
Crazy quilt stitching
.................................................................. S-28
Cross stitch stitches
.................................................................... D-2
Curve sewing
.............................................................................. S-2
Cut/Tension key
........................................................................ E-26
Cutting thread automatically
.................................................... B-44
Cylindrical pieces
....................................................................... S-2
D
Darning .................................................................................... S-34
Darning stitch
........................................................................... S-33
Decorative stitches & patterns
.................................................... D-2
Density key
................................................................................. E-8
Drawnwork
............................................................................... S-42
E
Editing
character/decorative stitches
.................................................. D-7
MY CUSTOM STITCH
.......................................................... D-20
Elongation key
........................................................................... D-8
Embroidering
........................................................................... B-66
Embroidering pattern
............................................................... B-66
Embroidering steps
................................................................... B-51
Embroidery
automatic thread cutting function (END COLOR TRIM)
........ E-28
edges or corners
................................................................... B-61
restarting from the beginning
................................................. E-24
resuming embroidery after turning off the power
................... E-24
ribbons or tape
..................................................................... B-61
small fabrics
......................................................................... B-61
thread color display
............................................................. B-67
Embroidery edit
changing the thread color
....................................................... E-7
combined patterns
..................................................... E-13, E-14
key functions
........................................................................... E-5
Embroidery foot installation
..................................................... B-52
Embroidery frame display
......................................................... E-28
Embroidery frames
inserting fabric
..................................................................... B-59
removing
.............................................................................. B-63
types
.................................................................................... B-58
using the embroidery sheet
.................................................. B-60
Embroidery key
................................................................ B-5, E-15
Embroidery pattern selection
.................................................... B-64
Embroidery pattern types
......................................................... B-64
Embroidery patterns
aligning the position
.............................................................. E-15
checking the position
........................................................... B-65
combining
............................................................................. E-13
editing
..................................................................................... E-5
patterns which use appliqué
.................................................. E-18
retrieving
............................................................................... E-34
saving
........................................................................ E-32, E-33
selecting
.................................................................................. E-2
Index
Index
A-24
using a frame pattern to make an appliqué ................. E-20, E-21
Embroidery sheet
..................................................................... B-60
Embroidery unit
......................................................................... B-4
attachment
........................................................................... B-54
carriage
................................................................................ B-54
removal
................................................................................ B-55
Embroidery unit removal
.......................................................... B-55
Error messages
......................................................................... A-20
Even seam allowance
.................................................................. S-3
Eyelet stitching
.......................................................................... S-36
F
Fagoting .................................................................................... S-39
Feed dog position switch
........................................................... B-3
Feed dogs
.................................................................................. B-3
Flat bed attachment
................................................................... B-2
Foot controller
......................................................................... B-38
Foot controller jack
.................................................................... B-3
Forward/Back key
..................................................................... E-24
Fraying, preventing
................................................................... S-12
Free motion quilting
.................................................................. S-31
free motion open toe quilting foot “O”
.................................. S-31
Front view
.................................................................................. B-2
H
Handle ....................................................................................... B-3
Handwheel
................................................................................ B-3
Heirloom stitching
.................................................................... S-42
Help key
......................................................................... B-5, B-16
Horizontal spool pin
................................................................ B-27
Horizontal stitching
.................................................................. S-37
I
Image key ..................................................................... B-65, D-10
Insert key
................................................................................. D-22
Inserting a piping
...................................................................... S-25
Installing bobbin
...................................................................... B-20
J
Joining ...................................................................................... S-41
K
Key functions
embroidery settings
............................................................... E-15
font edit
.................................................................................. E-9
MY CUSTOM STITCH
.......................................................... D-20
pattern edit
.............................................................................. E-5
Knee lifter
................................................................................ B-45
Knee lifter mounting slot
................................................. B-2, B-45
L
L/R Shift ................................................................................... B-42
LCD
........................................................................................... B-5
LCD messages
.......................................................................... A-20
LCD operation
......................................................................... B-11
LCD screen
cleaning
................................................................................. A-2
Leather/vinyl fabrics
.................................................................... S-5
M
Machine surface cleaning .......................................................... A-2
Main power switch
.................................................................... B-3
Maintenance
.............................................................................. A-2
Manual needle threading
......................................................... B-26
Mirror image key
................................................... B-44, D-8, E-7
Mirroring stitches
..................................................................... B-44
Multi color key
........................................................................... E-9
MY CUSTOM STITCH
designing
............................................................................. D-18
entering data
....................................................................... D-20
key functions
....................................................................... D-20
retrieving
............................................................................. D-23
saving
.................................................................................. D-23
storing in your list
................................................................ D-23
N
Needle
condition
.............................................................................. B-31
position
.................................................................................. S-8
replacement
......................................................................... B-31
threading
.............................................................................. B-25
types, sizes & uses
................................................................ B-30
Needle bar thread guide
............................................................. B-3
Needle plate
............................................................................... B-3
Needle plate cover
..................................................................... B-3
Needle plate marking
................................................................. S-3
Needle position button
............................................................... B-4
Needle threader
....................................................................... B-25
Needle threader lever
................................................................. B-2
Next page key
............................................................................ B-5
Non stick foot
............................................................................. S-5
O
Operating procedures ............................................................... B-16
Operation beep
.......................................................................... A-4
Operation buttons
...................................................................... B-4
Operation keys
................................................................ B-5, B-15
Operation panel
................................................................ B-2, B-5
Operation problems
................................................................... A-5
Optional accessories
.................................................................. B-7
Overcasting stitches
....................................................... S-12, S-13
P
Pant legs ..................................................................................... S-2
Parallel stitches
........................................................................ B-27
Part names & functions
............................................................... B-2
Patchwork
...................................................................... S-27, S-28
Pattern embroidery
................................................................... B-66
Piecing
..................................................................................... S-28
Piping inserting
........................................................................ S-25
Power supply jack
...................................................................... B-3
Power switch
.............................................................................. B-3
Presser foot
................................................................................. B-3
adjusting pressure
................................................................. B-45
Presser foot holder
...................................................................... B-3
Presser foot holder installation
.................................................. B-34
Presser foot holder removal
...................................................... B-34
Presser foot replacement
.......................................................... B-33
Presser foot/Needle exchange key
.............................................. B-5
Previous page key
...................................................................... B-5
Pulling up bobbin thread
.......................................................... B-27
Q
Quilting .................................................................................... S-30
Quilting guide
.......................................................................... S-31
R
Race ........................................................................................... A-2
Reinforcement stitch button
............................................. B-4, B-39
Reinforcement stitching
............................................................ S-33
Release button
.......................................................................... B-55
Removing presser foot holder
................................................... B-34
Replacing needle
...................................................................... B-31
Replacing presser foot
.............................................................. B-33
Index
Appendix A-25
MAINTENANCE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
A
Retrieving
character/decorative stitch patterns
...................................... D-16
machine’s memory
................................................... D-16, E-34
MY CUSTOM STITCH designs
............................................. D-23
USB media
............................................................... D-16, E-34
Reverse stitch button
....................................................... B-4, B-39
Reverse/reinforcement stitches
.................................................. B-39
Rotate key
.................................................................................. E-7
S
Satin stitches .............................................................................. D-2
Satin stitching
........................................................................... S-32
Saving
character/decorative stitches
................................................ D-14
machine’s memory
................................................... D-14, E-32
MY CUSTOM STITCH designs
............................................. D-23
USB media
............................................................... D-15, E-33
Scallop stitching
....................................................................... S-40
Seam allowance, even
................................................................ S-3
Seam ripper
.............................................................................. S-17
Selecting embroidery patterns
................................................... B-64
Set key
..................................................................................... D-21
Settings
automatic reinforcement stitching
......................................... B-39
automatic thread cutting
....................................................... E-28
display language
................................................................... B-15
thread tension
....................................................................... E-26
Settings key
................................................................................ B-5
Sewing basics
........................................................................... B-36
Sewing direction change
............................................................ S-2
Sewing speed controller
.................................................. B-4, S-32
Shell tuck stitch
........................................................................ S-41
Side cutter
................................................................................ S-13
Single/repeat sewing key
........................................................... D-9
Single/triple stitching key
......................................................... D-21
Size key
...................................................................................... E-6
Size selection key
...................................................................... D-8
Smocking
................................................................................. S-40
Solving operation problems
........................................................ A-5
Spool net
.................................................................................. B-18
Stabilizer
.................................................................................. B-58
“Start/Stop” button
...................................................................... B-4
Starting point key
...................................................................... E-15
Step stitch patterns
................................................................... D-13
Stippling
................................................................................... S-27
Stitch guide foot
......................................................................... S-3
Stitch length adjustment
........................................................... B-41
Stitch settings
............................................................................ B-46
Stitch types
............................................................................... B-36
Stitch width adjustment
............................................................ B-41
Straight stitch
......................................................... S-7, S-20, S-28
Stretch fabrics
............................................................................. S-5
T
Test key ................................................................................... D-23
Thick fabrics
............................................................................... S-4
Thin fabrics
................................................................................ S-5
Thread color display
................................................................. B-67
Thread cutter
................................................................... B-2, B-38
Thread cutter button
................................................................... B-4
Thread cutting, automatic
......................................................... B-44
Thread density key
.................................................................... D-9
Thread guide plate
...................................................................... B-2
Thread palette key
...................................................................... E-7
Thread tension
.......................................................................... E-26
Thread tension adjustment
........................................................ B-42
Threading
................................................................................. B-23
Threading needle
...................................................................... B-25
Threading needle manually
...................................................... B-26
Tips
............................................................................................ S-2
Top cover
................................................................................... B-2
Touch panel
............................................................................... B-5
Touch pen
...................................................................... B-5, B-15
Trial key
................................................................................... B-65
Trial sewing
................................................................................ S-2
Triple stretch stitch
........................................................... S-7, S-33
Troubleshooting
......................................................................... A-5
Twin needle
............................................................................. B-27
Twin needle sewing
................................................................. B-27
U
Upgrading ................................................................................ A-22
Upper thread
........................................................................... B-23
Upper thread spool
.................................................................. B-23
Upper thread tension
............................................................... B-42
USB media
recalling
.................................................................... D-16, E-34
saving
....................................................................... D-15, E-33
usable
....................................................................... D-14, E-31
USB port connector
................................................................... B-3
for media
.................................................................. D-15, E-33
Utility stitch key
......................................................................... B-5
Utility stitch selection screen
................................................... B-12
W
Walking foot ............................................................................. S-30
Winding bobbin
....................................................................... B-17
Wing needle
............................................................................. S-42
Z
Zigzag stitches ............................................................... S-13, S-27
Zigzag width adjustment
.......................................................... B-41
Zipper insertion
centered
..................................................................... S-20, S-24
side
....................................................................................... S-21
English
888-L01/L03/K00/K02
Printed in Vietnam
XG5439-2012
Please visit us at http://support.brother.com/ where you can get
product support and answers to frequently asked questions (FAQs).
6

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Brother Innov-is F480 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Brother Innov-is F480 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 13,52 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Andere handleiding(en) van Brother Innov-is F480

Brother Innov-is F480 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Nederlands - 212 pagina's

Brother Innov-is F480 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Deutsch - 212 pagina's

Brother Innov-is F480 Gebruiksaanwijzing - Français - 212 pagina's


Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info